www.carburetor-manual.com
Would you like some Free Manuals?
http://carburetor-manual.com/free-shop-manual-club-t-13.html
Also visit http://freeshopmanual.com for more Free Manuals
Also Visit my website for 7 FREE Download Manuals starting
with this one.
"The ABC's of Carburetion"
Click Here Now
file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/Tim/Desktop/carburetor-manual-welcome/index.htm[4/25/2009 11:42:20 AM]
The 2002 GMC Sierra Denali Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the air bag system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
3-1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
8-1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact GMC for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-10.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, GMC,
the GMC Truck Emblem and the name SIERRA and
DENALI are registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after
that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for GMC whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will
be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road.
If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it
so the new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part Number S2215A First Edition
ii
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
ECopyright General Motors Corporation 10/15/01
All Rights Reserved
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t,
you or others could be hurt.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle may be equipped with components and
labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols,
used on your vehicle, are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage or indicator.
NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could damage
your vehicle.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator reference the following
topics in the Index:
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
D
D
D
D
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different
colors or in different words.
Also see “Warning Lights and Gages” in the Index.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
“Engine Compartment Overview”
“Instrument Panel”
“Comfort Controls”
“Audio Systems”
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:
v
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-8
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-21
1-22
1-22
1-32
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag System
Center Passenger Position
1-34
1-37
1-39
1-43
1-63
1-66
1-66
1-67
Rear Seat Passengers
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults
Children
Restraint Systems for Children
Older Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
1-
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, and fold them up and down. It also tells you about
reclining front seatbacks and head restraints.
Power Seats
Horizontal Control: You can adjust your vehicle’s front
seats with the horizontal control located on the outboard
edge of each front seat.
Raise or lower the front of the seat by raising or
lowering the forward edge of the control. Raise or lower
the rear of the seat by raising or lowering the rear edge
of the control.
Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
whole control toward the front or toward the rear of
the vehicle.
Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers
the entire seat cushion.
Vertical Control: See “Reclining Front Seatbacks” later
in this section.
1-2
Power Lumbar Control
Use the lumbar control,
located on the outboard
side of the seat, to increase
or decrease lumbar support
in an area of the lower
seatback.
To increase support, press and hold the front of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the rear of
the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
You can also reshape the side wing area of the lower
seatback for more lateral support.
To increase support, press and hold the top of the
control. To decrease support, press and hold the bottom
of the control. Let go of the control when the lower
seatback reaches the desired level of support.
Memory Seat
The controls for the
memory seat are located on
the driver’s door trim panel.
The memory function can recall preset positions for the
driver’s seat cushion and the recliner. The memory function
does not store the lumbar or back support positions.
To set your memory seat do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired position.
2. Press the SET button and then press the 1 or 2 button
of the memory control within five seconds.
When your vehicle is in PARK (P), press the same
button of the memory control to recall the seat setting.
To do the same thing for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other number of the
memory control. The memory feature only works when
the transmission is in PARK (P).
1-3
Heated Front Seats
Reclining Front Seatbacks
The button for the driver’s
side heated seat is located
on the driver’s side door
panel. The button for the
passenger’s side heated seat
is located on the passenger’s
side door panel.
Your vehicles front seatbacks have a recline feature.
The ignition must be in RUN for this feature to operate.
To activate the heated seats, press the button once for
the HI heat setting. Press the button again for the LO
heat setting. To turn off the heated seats, press the button
a third time. An indicator light will illuminate for each
heat setting anytime the heated seats are operating.
The heated front seats will be canceled after the ignition
is turned to OFF. If you still want to use the heated front
seat feature after you restart your vehicle, you will need
to press the heated seat button again.
1-4
Vertical Control: You can use the vertical control to
adjust the angle of the seatback. Move the reclining
front seatback rearward or forward by moving the
vertical control toward the rear or toward the front of
the vehicle.
CAUTION:
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-5
Head Restraints
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces
the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The head restraints tilt forward and rearward also.
To tilt the head restraint forward, grasp the top of the
restraint and move it forward until you hear a click. It
will then be locked into that position until you need to
move it again. Pulling it forward past the last position
will allow the restraint to return to the upright position.
1-6
The rear seat can be folded open for more seating space.
To use the seat do the following:
Rear Seat
Folding the Rear Seat
The rear seat can be folded up to provide more cargo
space. To fold the seat do the following:
1. Pull forward on
the release strap
located under the
rear seat cushion.
1. Push rearward on the seat cushion while pulling up
on the release strap under the seat cushion.
2. Pull the seat cushion downward until it latches.
3. After pulling the seat cushion down, pull up on it to
make sure it is locked.
2. Fold the seat cushion upward until it latches with
the seatback.
3. Push and pull on the seat to make sure the seat
is secure.
1-7
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
1-8
CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a reminder
to buckle up. See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-9
Put someone on it.
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
or the instrument panel ...
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
1-11
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q:
If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
Q:
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding
in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called
“Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s
protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it
properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-13
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-14
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or
if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-15
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-16
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-17
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be much
too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied at the
abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt
goes under the armrests.
A:
The belt is over an armrest.
1-18
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work properly, or ask
your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-20
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-21
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier
in this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
Your vehicle has air bags -- one air bag for the driver
and another air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and
comply with federal regulations.
1-22
Here are the most important things to know about the air
bag system:
CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are designed to work with safety belts, but
don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to
work only in moderate to severe crashes where
the front of your vehicle hits something. They
aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear or
low-speed frontal crashes, or in many side
crashes. And, for some unrestrained occupants,
air bags may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful air bags have
provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or
not there’s an air bag for that person.
CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating
air bag, as you would be if you were leaning
forward, it could seriously injure you. Safety
belts help keep you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
air bags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Children.”
There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air
bag symbol.
CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
1-23
How the Air Bag System Works
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-24
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other air bag
covering.
The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
The air bag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.
As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off-Road
Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving.
When should an air bag inflate?
What makes an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher.
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the
right front passenger.
1-25
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the
instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and many side impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags.
Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a
supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
bag -- will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag
that come into contact with you may be warm, but not
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag
inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or from
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people
from leaving the vehicle.
1-26
CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the air bag system. The module records information
about the readiness of the system, when the system
commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment. The module also records speed,
engine rpm, brake and throttle data.
Air Bag Off Switch
Your vehicle has a switch on the instrument panel
that you can use to turn off the right front passenger’s
air bag.
D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that your air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly. You may have to replace the air
bag module in the steering wheel or both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
1-27
This switch should only be turned to AIR BAG OFF if
the person in the right front passenger’s position is a
member of a passenger risk group identified by the
national government as follows:
Medical Condition. A passenger has a medical
condition which, according to his or her physician:
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the
front seat because:
D makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag
D my vehicle has no rear seat;
D my vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate
a rear-facing infant seat; or
D the infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can
constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the
front seat because:
D my vehicle has no rear seat;
D although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12
sometimes must ride in the front because no space is
available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
D the child has a medical condition which, according
to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can
constantly monitor the child’s condition.
1-28
D causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk
for the passenger; and
in a crash greater than the potential harm from
turning off the air bag and allowing the passenger,
even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in
a crash.
CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned off
for a person who isn’t in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person won’t
have the extra protection of an air bag. In a
crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there. Don’t turn
off the passenger’s air bag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group.
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when
you have turned off the air bag, it means that
something may be wrong with the air bag system.
The right front passenger’s air bag could inflate
even though the switch is off.
If this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger’s seat) until you have your
vehicle serviced.
To turn off the right front passenger’s air bag, insert
your ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the
switch to AIR BAG OFF.
The AIR BAG OFF light will come on to let you know
that the right front passenger’s air bag is off. The right
front passenger’s air bag will remain off until you turn it
back on again, and the AIR BAG OFF light will stay on
to remind you that the air bag is off.
1-29
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
CAUTION:
To turn the right front passenger’s air bag on again,
insert your ignition key into the switch, push in, and
move the switch to the ON position.
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. They are probably part of
the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-30
Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Q:
If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the
front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bags
from working properly?
A:
As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags from working properly in a crash.
Q:
Is there anything I might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
A:
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in
the Index.
1-31
Center Passenger Position
Lap Belt
When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap
safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
1-32
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
1-33
Rear Seat Passengers
Lap-Shoulder Belt
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
1-34
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this
happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it
will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-35
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.
1-36
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for small adults. When
installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better
positions the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger in the rear
seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for children
who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller
adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the
shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide and
use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the
interior body.
1-37
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges
of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-38
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the
law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Infants and Young Children
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by the
appropriate restraint. Young children should not use the
vehicle’s safety belts, unless there is no other choice.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Passenger Positions” earlier
in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt
crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide onto the storage clip.
1-39
CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a
12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a
240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby
should be secured in an appropriate restraint.
1-40
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
outstanding protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.
1-41
Q:
What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In
addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
1-42
CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
CAUTION:
Restraint Systems for Children
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s hip
bones are still so small that the vehicle’s regular
safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones,
as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force on a body area that’s unprotected by any
bony structure. This alone could cause serious or
fatal injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to
restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface.
Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center
of the vehicle.
1-43
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-44
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q:
A:
How do child restraints work?
A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which is
purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help reduce
the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip
straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type
shield has straps that are attached to a wide,
shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.
1-45
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from
the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in the rear seat, including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat. There is limited space in the rear seating
area of an extended cab model. If you want to secure a
child restraint in a rear seating position of an extended
cab model, especially in the rear center position, be sure
to study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to see if there is enough room to secure your
seat properly.
If a forward-facing child seat must be secured in the
vehicle’s right front seat, the seat should be moved back
as far as possible. However, it is better to secure the
restraint in a rear seat.
If you want to secure a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front passenger’s seat, turn off the passenger’s air
bag. See “Air Bag Off Switch” and “Securing a Child
Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position” in the Index
for more on this, including important safety information.
1-46
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Be sure to turn
off the air bag before using a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position.
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint. If yours requires that the top
strap be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is
anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints are
designed for use with or without the top strap being
1-47
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it
should be anchored.
Right Front Passenger Position Top Strap Anchor
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed. If you have an
adjustable head restraint, route the top strap under it.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to
secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top strap
when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
You’ll find the top strap anchor for the right front
passenger seat behind the seat, near the floor.
1-48
Rear Seat Top Strap Anchors
You’ll find the top strap anchors for the rear seating
positions near the top of the seatback. In addition to the
top strap anchors, each seating position has a fabric loop
at the top of the seatback that you’ll use to route a top
strap through.
When using a child restraint with a top strap in either
rear outboard position, raise the head restraint and route
the top strap through the fabric loop on the seatback.
Then, attach the top strap to the anchor point at the
center rear seating position.
1-49
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle may have the LATCH system. If it does,
you’ll find anchors (A) in the front passenger seat,
where the seatback meets the seat cushion, and
anchors (A) in the center rear seat, where the seatback
meets the seat cushion. For front passenger seat position,
there is a top tether anchor (C) behind and to the bottom
of the seat to secure the top strap. For center rear seat
positions, there is a top tether anchor (C) near the
driver’s side rear seat head restraint to secure the
top strap.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each seating position with the LATCH
system will have a visible metal anchorage point in the
seat, where the seatback meets the seat cushion.
When using a child restraint with a top strap in the
center rear position, route the top strap through the
fabric loop on the seatback. Then, raise the head
restraint and attach the top strap to the anchor point
located at the closest outboard position.
1-50
In order to use the system, you need either a
forward-facing child restraint that has attaching
points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a
rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B),
as shown here.
1-51
CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be able
to protect a child sitting there. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or killed. Make
sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points, or
use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Child Restraints” in the Index for
information on how to secure a child restraint in
your vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belts.
With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint.
1-52
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want to
use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the back
of the seat cushion.
There is limited space in the rear seating area. If you
want to secure a child restraint in a rear outside seating
position, be sure to study the instructions that came with
your child restraint to see if there is enough room to
secure your seat properly.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See “Top Strap” in the
Index. Tighten the top strap according to the child
restraint instructions.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the
anchor points.
1-53
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around
the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the
child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-54
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint. If
you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you may
find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-55
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see “Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH)” in the Index.
You can secure a child restraint in the center rear
seat position.
There is limited space in the rear seating area. If you
want to secure a child restraint in a rear seating position,
especially in the rear center position, be sure to study the
instructions that came with your child restraint to see if
there is enough room to secure your seat properly.
You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the
child in the child restraint when and as the instructions
say. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
1-56
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
1-57
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see “Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH)” in the Index.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. There’s
a switch on the instrument panel that you can use to turn
off the right front passenger’s air bag when you want to
secure a rear-facing child restraint at the right front
passenger’s position. See “Air Bag Off Switch” in the
Index for more on this, including important safety
information.
1-58
CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Be sure to turn
off the air bag before using a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position. If a
forward-facing child restraint is suitable for your
child, always move the passenger seat as far back
as it will go.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when
you have turned off the air bag, it means that
something may be wrong with the air bag system.
The right front passenger’s air bag could inflate
even though the switch is off.
If this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger’s seat) until you have your
vehicle serviced. See “Air Bag Off Switch” in
the Index.
1-59
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s air bag. If
you are using a rear-facing child restraint in this seat,
make sure the air bag is turned off. See “Air Bag Off
Switch” in the Index. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, always move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing it in this seat. See “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-60
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-61
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
If you were using a rear-facing child restraint, turn on
the right front passenger’s air bag when you remove the
rear-facing child restraint from the vehicle unless the
person who will be sitting there is a member of a
passenger air bag risk group. See “Air Bag Off Switch”
in the Index.
1-62
CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned off
for a person who isn’t in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person won’t
have the extra protection of an air bag. In a
crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there. Don’t turn
off the passenger’s air bag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group. See “Air Bag Off
Switch” in the Index for more on this, including
important safety information.
Older Children
Q:
A:
What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should
not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the
thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-63
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
1-64
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt,
if your vehicle has one.
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in
a crash the child might slide under the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-65
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
1-66
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of the
collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
1-67
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-6
2-7
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-15
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-23
2-24
2-26
2-27
Windows
Keys
Door Locks
Keyless Entry System
Rear Doors
Tailgate
Theft
Content Theft-Deterrent
PasslockR
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transmission Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
2-
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-33
2-33
2-38
2-43
2-45
2-54
2-57
2-60
2-62
2-64
2-77
2-82
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Locking Rear Axle
All-Wheel Drive
QUADRASTEER (4WS)
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
OnStarR System (If Equipped)
HomeLinkR Transmitter
The Instrument Panel - Your
Information System
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Message Center
Secondary Information Center (SIC)
t
2-1
Windows
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome by
the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially
with the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
2-2
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
A power window control
is located on the inside of
each front door.
The driver’s window also has an express down feature
that allows the window to be lowered without holding
the switch. Press and hold the rear of the switch marked
AUTO briefly to activate the express down mode.
The express down mode can be canceled at any time by
pressing the opposite side of the switch. To open the
window partway, lightly tap the switch until the window
is at the desired position.
Swing-Out Windows
To open a rear swing-out
window, flip the latch open
and swing the glass out.
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger
window as well. Your power windows will work when
the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.
Press the rear of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to lower the window or press the front
of the switch to raise the window.
The latch will catch when the window is fully open
and it will also hold it in the open position.
2-3
Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-4
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door locks.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your key inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an
extra key.
Your vehicle also has a key
that locks and unlocks only
the center floor console.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
GM Roadside Assistance Center. See “Roadside
Assistance” in the Index.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar may be able to send a command to
unlock your vehicle. See “OnStar”in the Index for
more information.
If you ever lose your key, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining replacements.
2-5
Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
D Passengers -- especially children -- can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle won’t open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
D Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
D Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.
2-6
To lock and unlock your vehicle, do one of the following:
D You can use the keyless entry system.
D use your key,
D lock the door from the
inside by sliding the
manual lock lever
rearward. To unlock the
door, slide the manual
lock lever forward.
Power Door Locks
Keyless Entry System
Press the raised side of the
switch, marked L on either
front door, to lock all the
doors at once.
Press the recessed side of the switch marked U to unlock
all the doors at once.
The power door locks will operate at any time without
the ignition being on.
The power door locks can be programmed to
automatically lock and unlock depending on the settings
you have chosen in the secondary information center.
See “Secondary Information Center” in the Index for
more information.
You can lock and unlock your doors from about 3 feet
(1 m) up to 100 feet (30 m) away using the remote
keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Operating the power locks may interact with the
theft-deterrent system. See “Content Theft-Deterrent”
in the Index.
2-7
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
D Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
D Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions that follow.
D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Operation
UNLOCK: Pressing this button once will unlock the
driver’s door. The interior lamps will come on. Pressing
UNLOCK again within three seconds will cause the
remaining doors to unlock.
You can choose different feedback options for each
press of the UNLOCK button. See “Secondary
Information Center” in the Index for more information.
LOCK: Pressing this button once will lock all of the
doors. You can choose different feedback options for
each press of the LOCK button. See “Secondary
Information Center” in the Index for more information.
Operating the keyless entry transmitter may interact
with the theft-deterrent system. See “Content-Theft
Deterrent” and “Secondary Information Center” in the
Index for more information.
Remote Panic Alarm
When the horn symbol on the keyless entry transmitter
is pressed, the horn will sound and the headlamps and
taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds. This can be
turned off by pressing the horn button again, waiting for
30 seconds, or starting the vehicle.
2-8
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent
another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased
through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining
transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When
the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your
vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched.
Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost
transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle
can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter,
do the following:
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
NOTICE:
1. Insert a thin coin, or similar object, in the slot between
the covers of the transmitter housing near the key ring
hole. Remove the bottom by twisting the coin.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+) side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any
of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to
these surfaces may damage the transmitter.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-9
To open a rear access door
from the inside, the front
door must be opened first.
Then, use the handle located
on the inside of the rear
access door to open it.
Rear Doors
Your vehicle is equipped with rear access doors that
allow easier access to the rear area of the extended cab.
To open a rear access door
from the outside, first open
the front door. Then, use the
handle located on the front
edge of the rear access door
to open it.
Tailgate
You can open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle
while pulling the tailgate toward you.
You must fully close a rear access door before you can
close the front door.
2-10
To shut the tailgate, firmly push it upward until it latches.
After you put the tailgate back up, pull it back towards
you to be sure it latches securely.
Tailgate Removal
The tailgate on your vehicle can be removed to allow for
different loading situations. Although the tailgate can be
removed without assistance, you may want someone to
assist you with the removal to avoid possible damage to
the vehicle.
2. With the tailgate at a
slightly upward angle,
pull back on the tailgate
at the right edge and
then move the tailgate to
the right to release the
left edge.
To remove the tailgate, do the following:
1. Raise the tailgate
slightly and release
both retaining cable
clips. To release the
retaining cable clips,
lift the cable so that it
points straight out;
then, push the cable
clip forward.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tailgate.
Make sure it is secure.
2-11
Theft
Parking at Night
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can
make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways
you can help.
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your ignition and transmission will be locked. Also
remember to lock the doors.
If the key is in the ignition, with any door open,
and you try to lock your doors with the power door
locks, the driver’s door will not stay locked. This will
help to keep you from locking your keys in the vehicle.
2-12
Parking Lots
Even if you park in a lot where someone will be
watching your vehicle, it’s still best to lock it up and
take your keys. But what if you have to leave your
ignition key? What if you have to leave something
valuable in your vehicle?
D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.
D If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system,
take the transmitter with you.
D Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle is equipped with a content theft-deterrent
alarm system. You can disable the system or personalize
it to suit your needs. See “Secondary Information
Center” in the Index for more information.
With this system,
the SECURITY message
on the cluster will flash
as you open the door
(if your ignition is off).
This message reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the
remote keyless entry transmitter. The SECURITY
message should come on and stay on. If you are
using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the door
does not need to be open.
3. Close all of the doors. The SECURITY message
should go off after approximately 15 seconds.
The alarm is not armed until the SECURITY
message goes off.
Once the system is armed, if a door is opened without the
key or the remote keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will
go off. Depending on how you have programmed the
alarm in the secondary information center, the horn may
sound, the headlamps may flash or both the headlamps
and the horn will activate. See “Secondary Information
Center” in the Index for more information.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that you
can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the
alarm has been set off.
2-13
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
D If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
D Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm if the system has
been armed.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by
placing the key in the ignition and turning it to START.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the SECURITY message to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the
door with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound and the headlamps
do not flash, you may have the feature turned off.
See “Secondary Information Center” in the Index for
more information.
2-14
PasslockR
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a
valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock
cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY message flashes,
wait until the message stops flashing before trying to
restart the engine. Remember to release the key from
START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY message
comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if you
turn the engine off. However, your Passlock system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this
time. You may also want to check the fuse (see “Fuses
and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). See your dealer
for service.
In an emergency, call the GMC Roadside Assistance
Center. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
D Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for the first 500 miles (805 km).
D Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
D Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
2-15
Ignition Positions
With your key in the ignition switch you can turn it to
five different positions.
ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use
things like the radio, power windows and the windshield
wipers when the engine is off. Push in the key and
turn it toward you.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break
the key or the ignition switch. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition and
transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned
to LOCK.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine.
Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the
engine is off (for example, if your vehicle is being pushed).
RUN (D): This position is for driving.
START (E): This position starts your engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The Retained Accessory Power (RAP) feature will allow
certain features on your vehicle to continue to work up
to 20 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
2-16
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when
your vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
2-17
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0_F or -18_C), do this:
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
In very cold weather,
0_F (-18_C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater
can help. You’ll get
easier starting and better
fuel economy during
engine warm-up.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
key to START and hold it there up to 15 seconds.
When the engine starts, let go of the key.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing,
but this time keep the pedal down for five or six
seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
2-18
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32_F (0_C), use of the
coolant heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, near the power steering fluid reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Automatic Transmission Operation
CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach,
use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord
rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store
the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving
engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission
that features an electronic shift position indicator located
within the instrument panel cluster. This display is
powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being
moved out of PARK (P). This means that if your key is
in OFF, rather than LOCK, there will be a small current
drain on your battery which could discharge your battery
over a period of time. If you have to leave your key
in the ignition in OFF for an extended period, it is
recommended that you remove the IGN 0 fuse from
the instrument panel fuse block. See “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
2-19
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start your engine because
your vehicle can’t move easily.
CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer”
in the Index.
2-20
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see “Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine
doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
CAUTION:
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)
is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people
or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
If you need more power for passing, and you’re:
D Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h),
push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more,
push the accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes occasionally.
If you manually select SECOND (2), the transmission
will drive in second gear. You may use this feature for
reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are
trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery
road surfaces.
2-21
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is
moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into first
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Tow/Haul Mode Switch
NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t turn, don’t try to drive.
This might happen if you were stuck in very deep
sand or mud or were up against a solid object.
You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal.
This could overheat and damage the transmission.
Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold
your vehicle in position on a hill.
On cold days, approximately 32_F (0_C) or colder,
your transmission is designed to shift differently until
the engine reaches normal operating temperature.
This is intended to improve heater performance.
2-22
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow/haul mode.
The switch is located on the end of the column shift
lever. You can use this feature to assist when towing or
hauling a heavy load. See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the
Index for more information.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will flash. A chime will sound when the parking brake is
applied and the vehicle is moved at least 3 mph (5 km/h)
for at least three seconds.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, marked BRAKE
RELEASE, to release the parking brake.
2-23
Shifting Into PARK (P)
CAUTION:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,
even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the
steps that follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see
“Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
D Pull the shift lever toward you.
2-24
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
CAUTION:
D Move the lever up as far as it will go.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have to.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK(P).
2-25
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission”
in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then, move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-26
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-27
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
if the fan is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See “Blizzard” in the Index.
2-28
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.
Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time,
but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and
the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
QUADRASTEERt (4WS)
The QUADRASTEER System has a control and
diagnostic module that monitors and records current
system status and operational information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 4WS system it has
the ability to steer the vehicle with all four wheels.
All-Wheel Drive
Once this mode is selected, it is recommended to leave
the vehicle in this mode at all times.
With this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels
when extra traction is needed.
The 4WS system is equipped with three different
driving modes:
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle.
It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
D Two wheel steering (2WS)
D Four wheel steering (4WS)
D Four wheel steering with a trailer mode (4WS TOW)
2-29
The switch is located on the instrument panel.
2WS: In this mode the vehicle will operate like any
other vehicle with two wheel steering. If you want to
use 2WS and your vehicle is not in this mode, press the
4 Wheel Steer button until the 2WS indicator, located to
the right of the 4 Wheel Steer button, lights up. If the
2WS indicator is flashing you will have to center the
steering wheel by turning it to the left or right.
4WS: In this mode all four wheels will help steer the
vehicle. If you want to use 4WS, and your vehicle is not
in this mode, press the 4 Wheel Steer button, until the
4WS indicator, located to the right of the 4 Wheel Steer
button, lights up. If the 4WS indicator is flashing you
will have to center the steering wheel by turning it to the
left or right.
2-30
Slower Speed Mode (below 40 mph/64 kph)
At slower speeds the steering will operate in the lower
speed mode. This means the front and rear wheels will
turn in opposite directions. This helps the vehicle make
tighter turns, such as during parking, cornering and
turning into tight spaces.
4WS TOW: The 4WS TOW mode provides enhanced
stability allowing the trailer to follow the path of the tow
vehicle more closely, especially during lane changes.
In this mode the system operates much like the
4WS mode, but is enhanced for trailer towing.
It is recommended for all types and weights of trailers.
Higher Speed Mode (40 mph/64 kph and above)
At higher speeds the steering will operate in the higher
speed mode. This means the front and rear wheels will
turn in the same direction. This improves stability of the
vehicle during lane changes and sweeping turns.
To engage the 4WS TOW mode, press the 4 Wheel Steer
button until the 4WS and TOW indicators light up on
the instrument panel. If the TOW indicator is flashing
you will have to center the steering wheel by turning it
to the left or right. While in the 4WS TOW mode, it is
possible the steering wheel may be slightly off center.
2-31
Car Washes for QUADRASTEER
Equipped Vehicles
NOTICE:
Because your vehicle has a wider rear track some
car washes may be too narrow for your vehicle.
Conveyor systems on some automatic car washes
may damage your vehicle. Only use conveyor
system car washes with 13-inch (33 cm) wide
conveyor rails and/or stationary washes with
at least 82 inches (208 cm) between the rails.
Before using the car wash check with the manager.
2-32
Horn
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before
you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to give your
legs more room when you exit and enter your vehicle.
The tilt steering wheel lever
is located on the lower left
side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
D Turn and Lane-Change Signals
D Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
D Flash-to-Pass Feature
D Windshield Wipers
D Windshield Washer
D Cruise Control
For information on the exterior lamps, see “Exterior
Lamps” later in this section.
2-33
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up
or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the turn or
lane change.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs or a blown fuse
(see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal
lever to off.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low to high beam or high
to low beam, pull the multifunction lever all the way
toward you. Then release it.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
If you move the lever all the way up or down, and the
arrow flashes at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb
may be burned out and other drivers may not see
your turn signal.
2-34
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on.
Flash-to-Pass Feature
This feature allows you to use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you
want to pass. It works even if your headlamps are off.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not
so far that you hear it click.
If your headlamps are off or on low beam, your
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as
long as you hold the lever toward you. The high-beam
indicator on the instrument panel will come on. Release
the lever to turn the high-beam headlamps off.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the
band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain
or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time.
The closer to LO, the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the LO position. For high-speed wiping,
turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers, move
the band to OFF.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer
symbol at the top of the multifunction lever. To spray
washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle.
The wipers will clear the window and then either stop
or return to your preset speed.
CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
2-35
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator.
This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does
not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
CAUTION:
D Cruise control can be dangerous where
D
you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control.
Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.
2-36
Setting Cruise Control
CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
United States
Canada
The CRUISE light on the instrument panel cluster will
illuminate when the cruise control is engaged.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, disengages
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch from ON to
R/A (Resume/Accelerate) briefly.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep
going faster until you release the switch or apply the
brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the
switch at R/A.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the SET button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
D Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the switch. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
D Press and hold the SET button at the end of the
lever until you reach the lower speed you want,
then release it.
D To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET button briefly. Each time you do this,
you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
2-37
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Exterior Lamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this
to be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
D Step lightly on the brake pedal.
D Move the cruise control switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
The control on the driver’s side of the instrument panel
operates the exterior lamps.
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Turn the control clockwise to operate the lamps.
2-38
The exterior lamp control has three positions:
Automatic Headlamp System
(OFF): Turning the control to this position turns off
all lamps, except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
It also puts the system into automatic headlamp mode.
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as the
taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the instrument
panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
(Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps, together with
the following:
D Sidemarker Lamps
D Taillamps
D License Plate Lamps
D Instrument Panel Lights
D Roof Marker Lamps (If Equipped)
(Headlamps): Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
You can switch your headlamps from high to low-beam
by pulling on the turn signal/multifunction lever.
Your vehicle is equipped with a headlamp off delay,
which will keep the headlamps on for a short time after
the ignition is turned to OFF. For more information see
“Secondary Information Center” in the Index.
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of
the instrument panel in the defroster grille. Be sure it
is not covered, or the system will be on whenever the
ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
2-39
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so that
driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does
not affect the system. The DRL and automatic headlamp
system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a
change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is
off. Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake.
You may be able to turn off your automatic headlamp
system. See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” later in
this section for more information.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamps if you need them.
Lamps On Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition
is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY. To disable the
chime, turn the thumbwheel all the way down. In the
automatic mode, the headlamps turn off once the
ignition key is in OFF.
2-40
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully
functional daytime running lamps are required on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
D
D
D
D
D
The ignition is on,
the exterior lamp control off,
the automatic transmission is not in PARK (P),
the light sensor determines it is daytime and
the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.
The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps or the
last chosen headlamp setting that was used.
When you turn the exterior lamp control to off,
the headlamps will go off, and your DRL lamps will
illuminate, provided it is not dark outside.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the
parking brake, before starting the vehicle. Shifting the
transmission into PARK (P) will also allow you to idle
the vehicle with the DRL off. The DRL will stay off
until you release the parking brake or shift the
transmission out of PARK (P).
The following procedure applies only to vehicles first
sold in the United States.
When necessary, you may turn off the automatic
headlamp system and the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) feature by following these steps. When the system
is turned off, the headlamps will not automatically come
on when it becomes dark outside.
1. Turn the ignition to RUN.
2. Press the DOME OVERRIDE button four times
within six seconds. After the fourth press of the
button, a chime will sound informing you the
system is off.
The system will revert back to the automatic mode when
the DOME OVERRIDE button is again pushed four
times within six seconds (a chime will sound), or when
the ignition is turned off and on again.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Puddle Lamps
Your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps to help you
see the area near the base of the front doors when it is
dark out. The puddle lamps will illuminate when a door
is opened or when you press the UNLOCK button on the
keyless entry transmitter. You can program the puddle
lamps not to come on if you wish. See “Secondary
Information Center” in the Index for more information.
2-41
Fog Lamps
You can use your vehicle’s fog lamps for better vision in
foggy or misty conditions.
The fog lamp button is
located on the left side of
your instrument panel.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on while the
headlamps are on. Press the button again to turn them
off. An indicator light will glow in the button when the
fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use the fog lamps in the
dark without turning on the headlamps.
The fog lamps will go off whenever the high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off,
the fog lamps will come on again.
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after
you restart the vehicle, press the fog lamp button again.
Your parking lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must
be on for your fog lamps to work.
2-42
Interior Lamps
Illuminated Entry
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature.
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to the
exterior lamp control.
Turn the thumbwheel up to adjust the instrument panel
lights and return the radio display to full brightness
when the headlamps or parking lamps are on. To turn on
the dome lamps, with the vehicle doors closed, turn the
thumbwheel all the way up.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. The lamps will
not come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is
pressed in.
When a door is opened, the dome lamps and puddle
lamps will come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is
in the out position. If the DOME OVERRIDE button is
pressed in, the lamps will not come on.
Front Reading Lamps
Your vehicle has front
reading lamps located
in the overhead console.
Press the round button
located next to the lamp
to turn the lamp on.
The lamps can be adjusted
to point in the direction
you want them to go.
Press the button again to turn the lamp off.
2-43
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door
and the dome override button is in the out position.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamps control,
all the way up. In this position, the dome lamps will
remain on whether the doors are opened or closed.
You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located
below the exterior lamps control, to set the dome lamps
to come on automatically when the doors are opened, or
to remain off. To turn the lamps off, press the button
to the in position. With the button in this position,
the dome lamps will remain off when the doors are
open. To return the lamps to automatic operation,
press the button again and return the button to
the out position. With the button in this position,
the dome lamps will come on when you open a door.
Cargo Lamp
Press the button to turn the
cargo lamp on. Press the
button again to turn it off.
A message in the instrument
panel cluster will come on
and display CARGO LAMP
ON when the cargo lamp is
turned on and the ignition
key is turned to RUN.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, reading, glove box,
cargo and underhood lamps if they are left on for
more than 20 minutes when the ignition is turned off.
This will keep your battery from running down.
2-44
Mirrors
Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror
with Compass, Temperature Display and
OnStar Controls
When on, an electrochromic mirror automatically dims
to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.
Temperature and Compass Display
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to
turn the comp/temp display on or off.
If the display reads CAL, you will need to calibrate
the compass. For more information on calibration,
see below.
To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius
do the following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for four seconds
until either a flashing _F, or _C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be
locked in and the compass/temperature display
will return.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and
the outside temperature will both appear in the display at
the same time.
2-45
Electrochromic Mirror Operation
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
The electrochromic (self-dimming) mirror function is
turned on automatically each time the engine is started.
To operate the electrochromic mirror do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to the
left of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, press and
hold the on/off button for six seconds until the
green light comes on, indicating that the mirror
is in electrochromic (self dimming) mode.
2. Turn off the electrochromic mirror function by
pressing and holding the on/off button for six
seconds until the green indicator light turns off.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside of zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
2-46
2. Press and hold the on/off button for nine seconds or
until a Z and a zone number appears in the display.
The compass is now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release the
button. After about four seconds of inactivity,
the new zone number will be locked in and the
comp/temp display will return.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,
push the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds
or until CAL is displayed.
4. Calibrate the compass as described below.
D Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
D After five seconds, the display does not show a
compass heading (N for North, for example), there
may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the
compass. Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder
or a similar magnetic item.
D The compass does not display the correct heading
The compass can be calibrated in one of two ways:
until the display reads a direction, or
D drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after
several turns the compass will become calibrated and
will display a direction.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
2-47
Power Outside Rearview Mirrors
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat.
CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles)
look farther away than they really are. If you cut too
sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over
your shoulder before changing lanes.
Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors
The controls are located on the driver’s door armrest.
Move the upper selector switch to the left or right to
choose the mirror you want to adjust; then use the
arrows located on the four-way control pad to adjust
the mirror.
The mirrors include ground illumination lamps (puddle
lamps) in the base of the mirror. For more information
on these lamps, see “Puddle Lamps” in the Index.
2-48
The outside rearview mirrors have a defrost mode.
To turn on the defrost feature, press the rear window
defogger button. See “Rear Window Defogger” in the
Index for further information.
Driver’s Outside Auto-Dimming
Rearview Mirror
The driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of any
headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by the
on and off settings on the electrochromic mirror. See
“Electrochromic Mirror Operation” earlier in this section.
Storage Compartments
Your vehicle includes a number of compartments for
storage of often-used items.
Glove Box
To open your glove box, pull the lever upward and pull
the door downward.
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle has a console compartment between the
bucket seats.
To open it, insert and turn the console key in the lock,
and unlock the console. Press the button on the side and
swing the console lid open.
2-49
Cupholders
Your vehicle is equipped with cupholders, for the front
and rear seat passengers, located in the center console
and on the rear of the center console storage area. To use
the front cupholders press down on the raised area of the
access door. Close the door by pushing it all the way
down until it locks back into place. To access the rear
cupholders, pull down on the door located on the back
of the console.
Tonneau Cover
1. To remove, unsnap the
cover. Roll it up and
stow it using the buckle
and the strap located at
the front of the box.
A. Back rail
B. Side rail
C. Rear bow
D. Center bow
E. Front bow
F. Front rail
2. Remove the tonneau cover from the notch in the
front rail on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
2-50
4. To add cargo to the box,
remove all bows and
the back rail and stow
them safely.
3. Remove the three bows by gently pushing them
against the spring-loaded end. The three bows are
labeled front, center, rear to remind you of the order
in which to reinstall them.
To clean the tonneau cover, use mild soap and water.
If necessary, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt
trapped in the grain of the material.
2-51
Ashtray and Cigarette Lighter
The ashtray is located in the center console. Press the
raised area on the access door to use the ashtray.
To remove the ashtray first locate the indent on the right
side of the ashtray. Then, place an instrument, such as a
pen, in the indent and pry the ashtray out.
NOTICE:
If you store paper or other things that burn
in your ashtrays, they could be set on fire by
cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could
cause a fire and possibly damage your vehicle.
Do not store papers and other things that burn in
your ashtrays.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and
let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
NOTICE:
Holding a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it’s heating can make it overload, damaging
the lighter and the heating element. Just push the
lighter all the way in and let go. When it’s done,
it will pop back out by itself.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the top and
bottom visors. You can also swing the bottom visor
from side-to-side. The visors also have an extension
that can be pulled out for additional glare protection.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors
Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to
turn on the lamps. There is a slide switch to adjust
the intensity of the lamps.
2-52
Accessory Power Outlets
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
other devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems.
Your vehicle is equipped with four accessory power
outlets. The front outlet is located next to the
Secondary Information Center (SIC) on the floor
console. Lift up on the door to access the outlet.
The second outlet is located in the center console.
Press the button on the side of the console door to
access the outlet. See “Center Console Storage Area”
earlier in this section for more information.
NOTICE:
Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle
can damage it or keep other things from working
as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment, and never use anything that
exceeds the amperage rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
There are also two accessory power outlets located on
the rear of the center console. Lift up on the doors to
access the outlets.
NOTICE:
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlets and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use
of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
2-53
OnStarR System (If Equipped)
OnStar is a vehicle communications system that offers a
variety of services and provides a one-touch hands-free
communication link between you and the OnStar Center.
To receive OnStar services, a service subscription
agreement is required and an additional fee may be
required. Services are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week. For more information, call 1-888-ONSTAR-7
(1-888-667-8277).
Emergency Button: In an emergency situation,
press the emergency service button. Upon receiving the
call, an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and
assess the situation. If necessary, the advisor will alert
the nearest emergency service provider.
Communication Button: Press this button at
the end of a call. Also press this button to answer
a call from the center, or cancel a call if one of the
other buttons is accidentally pressed. This button is
also used to access OnStar Personal Calling and Virtual
Advisor services. See the OnStar owner package for
more information.
Volume Control: You can control the volume of
the OnStar System using either the volume control
knob on the radio or if equipped, the steering wheel
volume controls.
OnStar Services Button: Press this button once
to contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with
these services. If you are not quickly connected, the
system will automatically reset and redial. This ensures
connection to the center; there is no additional action
required. Press the Communication button to cancel the
automatic redial.
2-54
Telltale Light: This light will indicate the status of
the system. A solid green light will come on when you
start the vehicle to let you know that the system is on
and is ready to make or receive calls.
If the light blinks green it means that an incoming or
outgoing call is in progress. Press the Communication
button if you notice the light blinking and you are
not on a call.
The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system
malfunction. If this occurs press the OnStar button to
attempt to contact an advisor. If the connection is made,
the advisor will assist you with steps to take to make
sure that the system is functioning properly. If you
cannot contact the advisor, take your vehicle to your
dealership as soon as possible for assistance.
Cellular Antenna: The cellular antenna on the outside
of your vehicle is critical to effective communication
using the OnStar system. Optimum cellular reception
can be obtained when the mast is straight up and down.
Stolen Vehicle Tracking: Call the center at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) to report your
vehicle stolen. The system can then attempt to locate
and track your vehicle and the advisor will assist the
proper authorities.
Roadside Assistance with Location: For vehicle
breakdowns, press the OnStar Services button.
An advisor will contact the appropriate help.
OnStar Services
Remote Diagnostics: If an instrument panel light comes
on, press the OnStar Services button. An advisor can
perform a check of the engine on-board computer,
and recommend what action needs to be taken.
The following services are available within OnStar service
plans. Your vehicle comes with a specific one-year service
plan that allows use of some or all of the following services.
OnStar MED-NET: Med-Net can store your personal
medical history and provide it to emergency personnel if
necessary. (Requires activation and an additional fee.)
Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment: If an
air bag deploys, a priority emergency signal is sent
automatically to the center. An advisor will locate your
vehicle’s position, try to contact you and assist you in
the situation. If the center is unable to contact you, an
emergency service provider will be contacted.
Accident Assist: An advisor can provide step-by-step
guidance following an accident.
Remote Door Unlock: To contact the center, call
1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to provide your
security information. An advisor will send a command
to your vehicle to unlock itself. The advisor can delay
unlocking your vehicle. Remote Door Unlock is
disabled 48 hours after the vehicle is parked to maintain
the battery charge.
2-55
Vehicle Locator Service: To contact the center, call
1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to provide your
security information. An advisor will send a command
to your vehicle to sound the horn and/or flash the lamps.
Route Support: An advisor can provide directions or
guidance to most places you want to go. In addition,
they can help you locate gas stations, rest areas, ATMs,
hospitals, hotels, stores, eateries and more.
Ride Assist: An advisor can locate transportation in the
event that you are unable to drive.
Concierge Services: The concierge advisor can obtain
tickets, reservations or help with vacation/trip planning
and other unique items and services.
OnStar System Limitations
Complete limitations can be found on the subscriber
services agreement. In order to provide you with
excellent service, calls with the OnStar Center may be
monitored or recorded.
2-56
OnStar Service is:
D available in the 48 contiguous United States, Alaska,
Hawaii and Canada;
D available when the vehicle is within the operating
range of a cellular provider;
D subject to limitations caused by atmospheric
conditions, such as severe weather or topographical
conditions, such as mountainous terrain.
D subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations.
Global positioning locating capabilities will not be
available if satellite signals are obstructed.
OnStar will not function if the vehicle’s battery is
discharged or disconnected. It may also be inoperative
if the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle
electrical system components are damaged.
OnStar is the communication link between you and
existing governmental emergency and roadside service
providers. OnStar will receive your call and use
reasonable effort to contact an appropriate provider.
OnStar cannot promise that the providers will respond
in a timely manner or at all.
HomeLinkR Transmitter
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door you are programming.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Decide which one of the three channels (one of the
HomeLink buttons) you want to program.
2. Press and hold the desired button on HomeLink
through Step 3.
3. When the HomeLink indicator light begins to blink
slowly (this may take up to 30 seconds), hold the
hand-held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from HomeLink and then press and hold the
transmit button on the hand-held transmitter.
Continue to hold both buttons until the indicator
light on HomeLink begins to flash rapidly
(this may take up to 90 seconds).
2-57
If you have trouble programming HomeLink,
make sure that you have followed the directions exactly
as described and that the battery in the hand-held
transmitter is not weak. If you still cannot program it,
move the hand-held transmitter to the left or right or
forward or backward or flip it upside down. HomeLink
may not work with older garage door openers that do
not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards.
If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated
attempts, refer to “Training a Garage Door Opener with
a ’Rolling Code’ Feature” next in this section or contact
the manufacturer of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515,
or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter in
case you need to erase and reprogram HomeLink.
Training a Garage Door Opener with a
“Rolling Code” Feature (If Equipped)
If you have not previously programmed the hand-held
transmitter to HomeLink, see “Programming the
HomeLink Transmitter” listed previously. If you have
completed this programming already, you now need to
train the garage door opener motor head unit to
recognize HomeLink.
1. Find the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit. The exact location and
color will vary by garage door opener brand. If you
have difficulty finding the Learn or Smart button,
refer to your garage door opener owner’s manual
or contact the manufacturer of HomeLink at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist in
programming the transmitter.
2. Press the Learn or Smart button on the garage
door opener motor head unit. An indicator light will
begin to flash when the motor head unit enters the
training mode.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds to start Step 3.
2-58
3. Return to HomeLink in your vehicle and firmly
press and release the programmed HomeLink button
three times.
The rolling-code garage door opener should now
recognize HomeLink. You may either use HomeLink or
the hand-held transmitter to open the garage door.
If after following these instructions, you still have
problems training the garage door opener, contact the
manufacturer of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
Canadian Programming
Canadian Owners: During programming, the hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop transmitting after
two seconds. In this case, you should press and hold
the HomeLink button (see Steps 2 and 3 under
“Programming the HomeLink Transmitter”) while you
press and re-press (cycle) your hand-held transmitter
every two seconds until HomeLink is trained.
Operating the HomeLink Transmitter
Press and hold the appropriate button on HomeLink
for at least half of a second. The indicator light will
come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Channels
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash (approximately 20 seconds). Release both buttons.
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink to default settings, hold down the
two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash (approximately 20 seconds). Continue to hold both
buttons until the HomeLink indicator light turns off and
then release both buttons.
Accessories
Accessories for the HomeLink Transmitter are available
from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like
additional information, please contact the manufacturer
of HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-59
The Instrument Panel - Your Information System
2-60
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Dome Lamp Override Button
L. Hood Release
B. Exterior Lamp Control
M. Audio Steering Wheel Controls
C. Air Outlets
N. Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
D. Storage Compartment
O. Tilt Lever
E. Multifunction Lever
P. Parking Brake Release
F. Instrument Panel Cluster
Q. Secondary Information Center (SIC)
G. Shift Lever
R. Rear Window Defogger Button
H. Tow/Haul Selector Switch
S. Compact Disc Changer
I. Audio System
T. Ashtray
J. Comfort Control System
U. Accessory Power Outlet
K. Instrument Panel Fuse Block
V. Air Bag Off Switch and 4-Wheel Steer Button
W. Glovebox
2-61
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know
how fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
2-62
Speedometer and Odometer
Engine Hour Meter Display
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer can also display the number of hours
the engine has run. To display the hour meter, turn the
ignition off, press and hold the reset button for at least
four seconds. The hour meter will be displayed for up to
30 seconds, or until the ignition is turned on.
Trip Odometer
Tachometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the regular odometer.
Holding the reset button for two seconds while the trip
odometer is displayed will reset it.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by
operating the engine in the red area isn’t covered
by your vehicle warranty. Don’t operate the
engine with the tachometer in the red area.
2-63
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a message center that works along
with the warning lights and gages. See “Message
Center” in the Index.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
2-64
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensors,
the air bag modules, the wiring, the passenger air bag
suppression circuit and the crash sensing and diagnostic
module. For more information on the air bag system,
see “Air Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on
when you start your vehicle,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the air bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
2-65
Air Bag Off Light
When you turn the right front passenger’s air bag off,
this light will come on and stay on to remind you that
the air bag has been turned off. This light will go off
when you turn the air bag back on again. See “Air Bag
Off Switch” in the Index for more on this, including
important safety information.
2-66
CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s air bag is turned off
for a person who isn’t in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person won’t
have the extra protection of an air bag. In a
crash, the air bag wouldn’t be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there. Don’t turn
off the passenger’s air bag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group. See “Air Bag Off
Switch” in the Index for more on this, including
important safety information.
Voltmeter
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on when
you have turned off the air bag, it means that
something may be wrong with the air bag system.
The right front passenger’s air bag could inflate
even though the switch is off.
If this ever happens, don’t let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a member
of a passenger air bag risk group sit in the right
front passenger’s position (for example, don’t
secure a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger’s seat) until you have your
vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
When your engine is not running, but the ignition is in
RUN, this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in
DC volts.
2-67
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between
the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at idle
speed. As engine speeds are increased, this condition
should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the
charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
flash when you set the parking brake. The light will
flash if the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you
try to drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime
will sound when the vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h).
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
2-68
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will
come on when you start
your engine and may stay
on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-69
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210_F (100_C) or less. If you are pulling a
load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250_F (122_C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260_F (125_C) mark, it indicates that
the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
2-70
Transmission Temperature Gage
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission
temperature gage.
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the temperature
of the transmission fluid. The normal operating range is
from 100_F (38_C) to about 265_F (130_C).
At approximately 265_F (130_C), the message center
will display a TRANS FLUID HOT message and the
transmission will enter a transmission protection mode.
When the transmission enters the protection mode,
you may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. The transmission will return to normal shifting
patterns when the transmission fluid temperature falls
below 260_F (127_C).
If you keep driving your vehicle with the
transmission temperature gage above the
normal operating range, you can damage the
transmission. This could lead to costly repairs
that may not be covered under your warranty.
See “Message Center” in the Index for further
information.
If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of
approximately 275_F (135_C) or greater, the message
center will display a TRANS HOT...IDLE ENG warning
message. Pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe
to do so. Set the parking brake, place the transmission
in PARK (P) and allow the engine to idle until the
transmission temperature falls below 260_F (127_C).
If the transmission continues to operate above 265_F
(130_C), please contact your nearest dealer or the
GM Roadside Assistance Center.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
D Towing a trailer
D Hot outside air temperatures
D Hauling a large or heavy load
D Low transmission fluid level
D High transmission fluid level
D Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler.
NOTICE:
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on
a frequent basis, see “Scheduled Maintenance” in the
Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals.
2-71
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light in the United
States or Check Engine Light in Canada)
United States
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors
operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems.
NOTICE:
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure
that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the
vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE
light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated
by the system before any problem is apparent.
This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle.
This system is also designed to assist your service
technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
Modifications made to the engine, transmission,
exhaust, intake or fuel system of your vehicle
or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or CHECK ENGINE light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
This may also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
2-72
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
D Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
D Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the Light Is Flashing
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light off.
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
D Reducing vehicle speed.
D Avoiding hard accelerations.
D Avoiding steep uphill grades.
D If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
2-73
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See “Fuel” in the Index. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as
designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up,
stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration.
(These conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and
cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
2-74
Here are some things you need to know in order to
help your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE
light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This may take several days of routine
driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still
does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gage
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running.
Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as
possible. See “Check Eng Oil Pressure” and “Engine
Oil” in the Index.
2-75
Cruise Light
United States
Fuel Gage
Canada
The CRUISE light comes on whenever you set your
cruise control. See “Cruise Control” in the Index.
Tow/Haul Light
This light is displayed
when the tow/haul mode
has been activated.
For more information see, “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index.
2-76
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.
Here are some situations you may experience with
your fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem
with the fuel gage.
D At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
D It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took
a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
D The gage goes back to empty when you turn off
the ignition.
Message Center
The message center is located on the left side of the
instrument panel cluster. It gives you important safety
and maintenance facts. When you turn the ignition on,
the entire center lights up for just a few seconds.
As needed, the message center will display one of the
following messages. The message center is capable
of alternating among different messages if needed.
Battery
If this message is displayed
when the engine is running,
you may have a problem
with your charging system.
The battery display will also stay on while the key is in
RUN until the engine is started.
If the message stays on after starting the engine it could
indicate a problem with the generator drive belt, or some
other charging system problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving with this message displayed could drain
your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this message
displayed, it helps to turn off all your accessories,
such as the radio and the air conditioner.
2-77
Trans Fluid Hot
NOTICE:
The automatic transmission temperature warning display
is contained in the message center.
If you keep driving your vehicle with the
transmission TRANS FLUID HOT message
displayed, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered under your warranty.
If the transmission fluid
temperature becomes high,
the message center will
display this message.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
When the transmission enters the protection mode
you may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature
returns to normal, the display will turn off and the
transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.
D
D
D
D
D
D
Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a large or heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler.
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on
a frequent basis, see “Scheduled Maintenance” in the
Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals.
2-78
Low Coolant
Engine Overheated
This message is displayed
when the cooling system is
low on coolant.
The engine may overheat. See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index and have your vehicle serviced as soon as you can.
Check Coolant Temp
This message is displayed
when the cooling system
temperature gets hot.
Check the coolant temperature gage and the coolant
level. See “Engine Coolant” and “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” in the Index.
This message is displayed
when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot.
This message will be displayed after the air conditioning
system has automatically turned off for the engine
coolant protection mode. See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index for further information.
Reduced Engine Power
This message is displayed
when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot
and the engine further
enters the engine coolant
protection mode.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index for
further information.
2-79
Check Eng Oil Pressure
Change Engine Oil
This message is displayed
when the engine oil pressure
is low.
See “Oil Pressure Gage” in the Index for more information.
Check Eng Oil Level
This message is displayed
when the engine oil level
is low.
Once oil is added, it may need time to drain and settle in
the engine before this message will turn off. It is best to
let the engine cool down (if it is hot) or warm up (if it is
cold) and cycle the ignition to be sure this message turns
off. Refer to the dipstick for the correct level.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index on how to check the oil
level and for what type of oil to add.
2-80
This message is displayed
when the engine oil
needs to be changed.
The message is only
displayed for 15 seconds
at the start of each
ignition cycle.
When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message. See “Engine Oil,
When to Change” in the Index.
Security
This message is displayed
when the content
theft-deterrent system
has been activated and
also monitors the
PasslockR system.
If the security message is displayed continuously while
driving and stays on, there may be a problem with the
Passlock system. Your vehicle will not be protected by
Passlock, and you should see your GM dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
Low Fuel
This message is displayed
when the vehicle is low on
windshield washer fluid.
The message is only
displayed for 15 seconds
at the start of each
ignition cycle.
For more information see, “Windshield Washer Fluid”
in the Index.
This message is displayed
when your vehicle is
low on fuel.
Refer to the fuel gage for a better indication of the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
Cargo Lamp On
This message is displayed
when the cargo lamp is
turned on and the ignition
key is turned to RUN.
2-81
Secondary Information Center (SIC)
This section explains the features of your SIC.
The SIC provides instant information about fuel,
mileage and vehicle history in addition to allowing you
to personalize certain features of your vehicle. If you
would like to skip to the section on personalizing your
vehicle, see “Menu” listed later in this section.
Fuel
D Each press of the FUEL button will change the
display between the fuel remaining range, average
fuel economy, instantaneous fuel economy and a
blank display.
D The average fuel economy can be reset using the
RESET button.
Trip
Each press of the TRIP button will change the display
between personal trip computer, business trip computer,
timer, vehicle history, annual mileage and a blank display.
2-82
Personal Trip Computer and Business
Trip Computer
D Each press of the arrow button will change the
display between on/off, trip odometer, fuel used,
average fuel economy and average speed.
D The ON/OFF button will turn the trip computer on
and off. The information on the trip computer only
gets updated when it is turned on. The personal
and business computers function independently, i.e.
turning one of them on does not turn the other off.
D All information associated with the trip computer
will be reset when the RESET button is pressed.
D If the RESET button is pressed and held for more
than two seconds, all of the trip computer settings
will reset starting from the last ignition cycle
(turning the ignition from OFF to RUN).
Timer
D Each press of the ON/OFF button will turn the timer
on or off.
D The RESET button will reset the timer to 00:00:00.
D If turned on, the timer will accumulate whenever
the SIC is powered (the engine does not have to
be running).
D The timer will rollover after 99:59:59.
Vehicle History Last 15 Days
D The first press of the arrow button will display the
maximum speed and accumulated mileage for the
current day.
D Every press of the arrow button after will display the
maximum speed and accumulated mileage for the
previous day.
D This feature requires the date and time to be set
correctly. Refer to the setting of day/date/time under
“Menu” explained later in this section.
Annual Mileage
D The annual mileage displayed is the mileage
accumulated since the annual mileage was reset.
D Pressing the RESET button will reset the annual
mileage to 0.
D Pressing the arrow button will display the ratio of
personal trip computer mileage to annual mileage as
a percent.
D Pressing the arrow button again will display the ratio
of business trip computer mileage to annual mileage
as a percent.
2-83
Menu
Press the MENU button to choose a feature you
would like to personalize (the features are listed below).
Each press of the button will display a new item that
can be personalized. Use the arrow button to choose the
setting you would like to use within the chosen feature.
For example, you would prefer to personalize the
automatic door locks so that the automatic locking
feature is disabled. You would do the following:
1. First press the MENU button until you reach the
Automatic Door Lock screen.
2. Next, press the arrow button until you find the
Disabled setting.
3. The setting is now actually set without having to
do anything else. You can do one of three things
at this point:
D You can leave the personalization mode by
pressing FUEL or TRIP.
D You can just let the SIC exit the personalization
mode on its own by waiting approximately
15 seconds without touching any buttons.
The SIC will then display the day/date.
D Or you can press the MENU key to move on to
the next programmable feature.
2-84
The following is a list of the personal settings that can
be changed:
Automatic Door Lock
D Enabled: Doors automatically lock when vehicle
speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h) for two seconds.
D Disabled: Doors do not lock automatically.
Automatic Door Unlock:
D Driver: Driver’s door unlocks when the key is
removed from the ignition.
D All: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
D Disabled: Doors do not unlock automatically.
Remote Lock Feedback
D Horn: Horn chirps on second press of the LOCK
button on the keyless entry transmitter.
D Lamps: Parking lamps flash on each press of the
LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter.
D Horn and Lamps: Parking lamps flash on each
press, horn chirps on second press of LOCK on the
keyless entry transmitter.
D None: No horn or lamp feedback to the LOCK
button on the keyless entry transmitter.
Remote Unlock Feedback
Perimeter Lamps
D Horn: Horn chirps on second press of the UNLOCK
D Enabled: Parking lamps, headlamps and puddle
button on the keyless entry transmitter.
lamps turn on for 40 seconds with the UNLOCK
button on the keyless entry transmitter. This feature
only operates when it is dark.
D Lamps: Parking lamps flash on each press of the
UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter.
D Horn and Lamps: Parking lamps flash on each
press, horn chirps on the second press of the
UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter.
D None: No horn or lamp feedback will occur when
the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter
is pressed.
Headlamp Delay
D None: Headlamps do not stay on after the ignition is
turned to OFF.
D 10/20/30/60/120/180 Seconds: Amount of time
headlamps stay on after the ignition is turned to
OFF when it is dark (switch must be in auto
headlamp position).
D Disabled: Feature disabled, no perimeter lamps
will come on.
Alarm Warning
D Horn: Horn will sound when alarm is active.
D Lamps: Headlamps and parking lamps will cycle
on and off when alarm is activated.
D Horn and Lamps: Horn and lamps will alternate
when the alarm is activated.
D None: No alarm warning will come on.
Language
D
D
D
D
English: All information displayed in English.
French: All information displayed in French.
Spanish: All information displayed in Spanish.
Arabic: All information displayed in Arabic.
2-85
Display Units
Language and Personalization Reset
D English: Units displayed in English units.
D Metric: Units displayed in metric units.
1. Press and hold the MENU button. After two seconds,
the display will begin cycling through the languages
at one second intervals. Release the MENU button
when the desired language is displayed.
Day/Date/Time
D The RESET button will enable the operator to reset
the day/date/time. Each press of the RESET button
will scroll through the following: set year, set month,
set day, set hour, set minutes and set AM/PM.
D Whichever is currently selected (i.e. year, month,
day, etc.) will flash. The arrow button is then used to
adjust the value. Each press of the arrow button will
change the value by one. If the arrow button is
pushed and held, the value will keep changing until
the button is released.
D While in menu mode, the SIC will display the
day/date if no buttons have been pressed for more
than 15 seconds.
2-86
2. The previous action will also reset the personalization
values to their factory default settings which are
as follows:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Automatic Door Lock: Disabled
Automatic Door Unlock: All
Remote Lock Feedback: Horn
Remote Unlock Feedback: Lamps
Headlamp Delay: 30 seconds
Perimeter Lamps: Enabled
Alarm Warning: Horn and Lamps
Display Units: English
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-9
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Ventilation System
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and
MIN Buttons
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control
3-13
3-16
3-19
3-21
3-22
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-24
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Compact Disc Changer
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Fixed Mast Antenna
3-
3-1
Comfort Controls
Heater and Air Conditioning Comfort
Controls
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area.
Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer
air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area
for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
(Vent): This mode directs the air through the
instrument panel outlets and the center floor console
outlets.
Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the control panel adjusts the
fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob clockwise.
To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise. To turn
the fan off, turn the knob to OFF.
3-2
(Bi-Level): Air is delivered through the
instrument panel outlets and center floor console outlets,
as well as the floor outlets. The air flow can be divided
between panel and floor depending upon where the knob
is placed. Pressing the A/C button while in this mode
causes cooler air to come out of the instrument panel
outlets and center floor console outlets and warmer air
to come out of the floor outlets.
(Floor): This mode directs most of the air through
the floor outlets and center floor console outlets, as well
as some air through the windshield defroster outlets and
side window defroster outlets. If air from the center
floor console outlets is not desired, turn the vents off at
the console.
(Defog): Airflow is delivered through the floor
outlets, center floor console outlets, the windshield
defroster outlets and the side window defroster outlets.
The air flow can be divided between floor and defrost
depending upon where the knob is placed. When in
blend mode, the air conditioning compressor may run
to assist in dehumidifying the air and limit window
fogging.
(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air
through the windshield defroster outlets with airflow
also delivered from the side window and the floor
outlets. When in defrost mode, the air conditioning
compressor may run to assist in dehumidifying the air
and limit window fogging.
Mode Buttons
(Outside Air): This mode should be used for
normal system operation and directs the system to use
outside air. Using outside air will limit stale air odors
and help to prevent excessively humid interior air
(from wet boots or clothing or maximum passenger
loads) from being redirected onto windows.
Pressing the outside air button will cancel the
recirculation button.
(Recirculation): This mode limits the amount of
outside air entering the vehicle to a very small amount.
This will be helpful to limit odors entering the vehicle
and will assist in reaching comfort in very hot
temperature conditions. Pressing recirculation will cause
the system to recirculate interior air continuously and
may cause the vehicle windows to fog if the passenger
compartment floor is excessively wet.
Pressing the recirculation button will cancel outside air
operation. To return to normal system operation and to
prevent stale passenger compartment air, be sure to
return to the outside air position.
3-3
Recirculation will not be available in floor, blend, or
defrost modes. This helps reduce window fogging.
If the recirculation button is pressed in these modes,
the LED indicator for recirculation will flash three times
indicating that outside air is activated and recirculation
is not available.
Air Conditioning
If the air conditioning system is activated and system
demand is high in situations such as city traffic, idling,
or very hot weather, the system will automatically
switch from outside air to recirculation. The LED
indicator will not change. After demand on the system
is reduced, the system will return to outside air.
The A/C button, located below the mode knob, allows
the air coming into your vehicle to be cooled. This
setting is useful for normal cooling on hot days. When
you use air conditioning with the recirculation button
pressed, turn off recirculation as soon as the vehicle
reaches a comfortable interior temperature.
A/C (Air Conditioning): This button is used to
control the air conditioning compressor. Turning the
system on will allow air to be cooled and dehumidified
inside the vehicle.
Using air conditioning with the recirculation mode
active allows the air inside your vehicle to be
recirculated. This setting helps to maximize your air
conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s fuel
economy. This setting also cools air the fastest and can
be used to keep unwanted odors and/or dust from
entering the vehicle. When using the air conditioner,
turn off recirculation and use outside air after the vehicle
reaches a comfortable interior temperature. When the
right knob on the control panel is between floor and
defrost, recirculation will not function to reduce window
fogging.
Air conditioning will be automatically disabled when
the outside air temperature drops below a level at which
air conditioning is effective.
3-4
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
air inside escape. This reduces the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditioner to work its best.
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
The heater works best if you keep your windows closed
while using it. On cold days, use the floor or bi-level
modes with the temperature knob in the red area.
On cool, humid days, use blend mode to keep the
windshield and side windows clear. Use defrost mode to
remove fog or ice from the windshield in extremely
humid or cold conditions. Use defrost mode with the
temperature knob toward the red area and the fan knob
turned all the way clockwise.
On cold days, approximately 32_F (-0_C) or lower you
may experience differences in how the transmission
shifts until the engine is warm. This feature
automatically reduces the time it takes for the engine to
reach normal operating temperature and shortens the
time it takes the heater to reach full output.
If you use the engine coolant heater before starting your
engine in cold weather, 20_F (-8_C) or lower, the
heating system will produce warmer air faster to heat the
passenger compartment.
The use of an engine coolant heater also reduces the
time it takes for the engine to reach normal operating
temperature. For more information, see “Engine Coolant
Heater” in the Index.
3-5
Rear Window Defogger
The lines running across the rear window are the rear
window defogger. The lines warm the glass.
To turn on the rear window
defogger, press this button
next to the fan knob.
The defogger will shut itself off after several minutes.
If you need additional warming time, press the button
again. You can turn the defogger off at any time by
pressing the button.
The rear window defogger button will also activate the
heated outside mirrors.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
NOTICE:
The rear window defogger will only work if the ignition
is in RUN. For best results, clear the window of as much
snow or ice as possible.
3-6
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use vent and the outside air setting to
direct outside air through your vehicle. Air will flow in
through the instrument panel outlets.
Your vehicle has air
outlets in the center and
on the sides of your
instrument panel.
Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air to
the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. With the
side windows closed, air will flow into the front air
inlet grilles, through the vehicle, and out the air
exhaust valves.
Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or
the air conditioning compressor is running, unless you
have the recirculation button pressed. For more
information on the recirculation button, see “Air
Conditioning” earlier in this section.
You can move the outlets from side-to-side or up and
down to direct the flow of air. The left driver and
passenger outlets have shut off levers. Turn the lever to
the left to shut off air flow or to the right to allow air
flow. When you close an outlet, it will increase the flow
of air coming out of any outlets that are open. The
center outlet does not completely shut off airflow.
3-7
Ventilation Tips
D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
fan knob all the way toward the red area for a few
moments before driving. This helps clear the intake
ducts of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance
of fogging the inside of your windows.
D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
D The use of non-GM approved hood air deflectors
may adversely affect the performance of the heating
and air conditioning system.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Your vehicle is equipped with a passenger compartment
air filter, which filters outside air entering the vehicle.
For information on replacing the filter see “Passenger
Compartment Air Filter” in the Index.
3-8
Audio Systems
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Find out what your audio system can do and how
to operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition is turned off. See
“Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.
Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and
MN Buttons
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute
appears on the display. To display the clock with the
ignition off, press RECALL or HR/MN and the time
will be displayed for a few seconds. There is an initial
two-second delay before the clock goes into the
time-set mode.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Each notch on the
control ring allows for more volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you drive, SCV
automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to
overcome noise at any speed. The volume level should
always sound the same to you as you drive. If you don’t
want to use SCV, turn the control all the way down.
Finding a Station
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to increase
volume. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
The knob is capable of being turned continuously.
RECALL: Pressing this button will display the station
being played or it will display the clock. Clock display
is available with the ignition turned off.
3-9
SEEK : Press the right or left arrow to seek to the
next or previous station and stay there. The radio will
seek to stations with a strong signal only. The sound will
mute while seeking.
To scan station, press and hold SEEK for two seconds
until SCAN appears on the display. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds and flash the station
frequency, then go on to the next station. Press one of
the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning. The radio will
scan to stations with a strong signal only. The sound will
mute while scanning.
P.SCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button and P. SCAN
will appear on the display. The radio will go to the first
preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds and flash the station frequency, then go on to
the next preset station. This feature will only scan the
six presets that are in the selected band. Press this button
again or a pushbutton to stop scanning presets. The
channel number (P1-P6) will appear momentarily just
before the frequency is displayed. The radio will scan
preset stations with a strong signal only. The sound will
mute while scanning.
3-10
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound
will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to
decrease bass.
BAL (Balance): Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob clockwise to adjust sound to the right
speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left
speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
TREB (Treble): Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and
counterclockwise to decrease treble. If a station is weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose
bass and treble equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and
classical stations.
Each time you press the AUTO TONE button, this
feature will switch to one of these program types.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, either
press and release the AUTO TONE button until the
display goes blank or press and release the BASS or
TREB knobs and turn them until the display goes blank.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers
and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the rear
speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer
than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press
EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.
If the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will
begin playing.
3-11
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls just as you do
for the radio. The tape symbol and a direction arrow will
be on the display whenever a tape is being played.
Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for
play first.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton or the left
SEEK arrow to search for the previous selection. A
minimum three-second blank gap is required for the
player to stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape
direction arrow will blink while in previous mode.
2 PROG (Program): Press this pushbutton to switch
from one side of the tape to the other.
3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton or the right SEEK
arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink while in next mode. The sound will
mute while searching for the next selection.
3-12
REV 4 (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to rapidly
reverse the tape. Press this pushbutton again to stop
reversing the tape. The radio will play the last selected
station while reversing the tape. The tape direction
arrow will blink while in reverse mode.
D
5 (Dolby): Press this pushbutton to reduce cassette
tape noise. The double-D symbol will appear on the
display while the player is in this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD 6 (Forward): Press this pushbutton to rapidly
forward the tape. Press this pushbutton again to stop
forwarding the tape. The radio will play the last selected
station while forwarding the tape. The tape direction
arrow will blink while in forward mode.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when
playing a tape.
TAPE AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
tape when listening to the radio. The lighted arrow will
appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in
the active mode.
EJECT: Press this button to stop a tape when it is playing
or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject may be
activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be loaded
with the radio and vehicle off if this button is pressed first.
Cassette Tape Messages
CLN (Clean): If this message appears on the display,
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still
play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for
five seconds. The tape symbol on the display will
flash for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will power
up the radio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until the EJECT
button is pressed.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and
control any of the music sources: AM-FM, cassette
tapes and CDs, through the Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
controller. However, the rear seat passengers can only
control the music sources that the front seat passengers
are not listening to. For example, rear seat passengers
may listen to a cassette tape through headphones while
the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers.
The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for
each set of headphones. Be aware that the front seat
audio controls always have priority over the RSA
controls. If the front seat passengers switch the source
for the main radio to a remote source, the RSA will play
the same remote source. The rear speakers will be muted
when the RSA power is turned on. You may operate the
RSA functions even when the main radio is off.
Primary Radio Controls
The following function is controlled by the knob on the
main radio:
PWR (Power): Push this knob twice to turn RSA off.
3-13
Rear Seat Audio Controls
VOL (Volume): Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and
counterclockwise to decrease volume. Push the knob
back into its stored position when you’re not using it.
The upper knob controls the upper headphone and the
lower knob controls the lower headphone.
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. If the front passengers are already listening to
AM FM, the RSA controller will not switch between the
bands and cannot change the frequency.
The following functions are controlled by the RSA
system buttons:
PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the rear seat
audio system on or off. The rear speakers will be muted
when the power is turned on. You may operate the rear
seat audio functions even when the primary radio power
is off.
3-14
Press AM FM to return to listening to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
SEEK : While listening to AM, FM1 or FM2,
press the up arrow to tune to the next station and stay
there. Press the down arrow to tune to the previous
station and stay there. The sound will mute while
seeking. If the front radio is in use, you cannot seek
through different stations.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the up arrow to
hear the next selection on the tape. Press the down arrow
to go back to the previous selection. If the cassette tape
on the front radio is in use, you cannot seek through
different selections on a tape.
While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear
the next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to
go back to the start of the current track (if more than
eight seconds have played). If the CD player on the front
radio is in use, you cannot seek through different tracks.
To scan preset stations, press and hold SEEK until the
radio goes into scan mode. The radio will go to a station,
play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning. If the
front radio is in use, you cannot scan through different
stations.
P.SET PROG (Preset Program): The front passengers
must be listening to something different for each of
these functions to work:
D Press this button to scan through the preset radio
stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.
The radio will go to a preset station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
D When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to
go to the other side of the tape.
D When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to select a disc.
TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between playing
a tape and CD changer if all are loaded. Press AM FM
to return to the radio when a cassette tape or CD is
playing. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
3-15
Compact Disc Changer
NOTICE:
Loading CDs with adhesive labels will damage
the player.
To load a CD perform the following steps:
The compact disc changer plays up to six standard size
CDs continuously. Individual CDs may be loaded or
ejected into or from any position.
A green light on each numbered button indicates a CD is
loaded in the respective position. An amber light on a
numbered button indicates that a CD is playing. When
loading CDs, the loading slot indicators turn amber to
indicate that the player is ready to accept a CD. CDs can
be loaded or ejected with the radio or the ignition being
on or off.
You must load CDs with the label side up. If you do not,
the player will automatically eject the CDs.
3-16
1. Press the LOAD button. Available positions will
blink amber.
2. Select a position by pressing the desired numbered
button with the amber blinking light. If a button is
not pressed within five seconds, the changer will go
to the lowest available position.
3. Load the CD when the loading slot indicators turn
amber. An internal door will open allowing a single
CD to be inserted into the changer. After
approximately 10 seconds the changer will be ready
to play.
To load two or more CDs perform the
following steps:
There are two ways to play a CD. Perform one of the
following:
1. Press and hold the LOAD button. The first CD will
be loaded into the lowest numbered empty position.
D Press the desired numbered button with a green
2. Load a single CD when the loading slot indicators
turn amber. After about 10 seconds the changer will
cycle to the next available position.
D Press the CD TAPE button on the radio. The CD
3. Repeat Step 2 until all CDs are loaded into all of the
desired positions. If you do not wish to load all of
the positions, you can cancel the load all function by
pressing a button with a green flashing indicator
light or wait 20 seconds for the changer to time out.
To eject a single CD perform the following steps:
1. Press the eject button (upward pointing arrow).
The buttons with loaded CDs will blink amber.
2. Press one of the amber blinking buttons to select the
location of the CD you want to eject. The changer
will move to that location and eject the CD. If you
do not remove the CD from the player within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the eject button
is pressed and a numbered location button is not
pressed within five seconds, the current or last
played CD will be ejected.
To eject all CDs, press and hold the eject button.
indicator light on the CD changer.
changer will go to its last played position.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous track if the current track has been playing for
less than eight seconds. If this pushbutton is pressed and
the current track has been playing for more than eight
seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current track.
If you hold or press this pushbutton more than once, the
player will continue moving back through the CD. The
sound will mute while seeking.
2 PROG (Program): Press this pushbutton to select a
CD. The CD number and track number will be
displayed.
3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the
CD. The sound will mute while seeking.
REV 4 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly through a track. Release it to
resume playing.
3-17
FWD 6 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly through a track. Release it to
resume playing.
Compact Disc Changer Errors
SEEK : Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the
next track on the CD. Press the left SEEK arrow to go
to the previous track on the CD. The sound will mute
while seeking.
D You are driving on a very rough road. (The CD
P.SCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. DSC will
appear on the radio display, which will randomly play
the tracks on the current CD. Press this button again to
make the radio display ALL, which will randomly play
all of the loaded CDs. Press this button again to turn off
random play, OFF will appear on the radio display.
AM FM: Press AM FM to listen to the radio when a CD
is playing.
TAPE AUX: Press this button if you have a CD loaded
in the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a CD.
Press this button to switch between playing a tape and
the CD changer if both are loaded.
3-18
ERR (Error): If this message appears on the display, it
could be for one of the following reasons:
should play when the road gets smoother.)
D A CD is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
D The CD player is very hot.
Press RECALL to make ERR turn off the display.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power
for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret
code before it will operate.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between
any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and
you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 pushbuttons at the same time.
Hold them down until --- shows on the display.
Next you will use the secret code number which you
have written down.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
8. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The
LED indicator by the volume knob will begin
flashing when the ignition is turned off.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
3-19
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code
matches the secret code you have written down. The
display will show SEC, indicating the radio is now
operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
3-20
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 pushbuttons at the same time. Hold
them down until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code
matches the secret code you have written down. The
display will show ---, indicating that the radio is no
longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent
Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
You can control certain radio functions using the buttons
on your steering wheel.
PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station
you have programmed on the radio preset buttons on the
selected band. If a cassette tape is playing, press this
button to play the other side of the tape. If a compact
disc is playing in the CD changer, press this button to go
to the next available CD.
SEEK : Press the up or down arrow to seek to the
next or previous radio station and stay there. If a cassette
tape or compact disc is playing, the player will advance
with the up arrow and reverse with the down arrow.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again to turn on the sound.
VOL
(Volume): Press the up or down arrow to
increase or decrease volume.
3-21
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
3-22
To help avoid hearing loss or damage do the following:
1. Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
2. Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Electronics radio or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is
possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut tape
detection feature on your radio may recognize it as a
broken tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being
ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
2. Turn the radio off.
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette
tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer (GM Part No. 12344789).
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for
five seconds. The tape symbol on the display will
flash for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
3-23
After you clean the player, press and hold the EJECT
button for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The
radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-24
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the cowl. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-9
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-28
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off
Paved Roads
Driving at Night
4-30
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-38
4-42
4-42
4-48
4-49
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
Towing a Trailer
4-
4-1
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See “Safety Belts” in the Index.
4-2
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task -- such as concentrating on a cellular telephone
call, reading, or reaching for something on the
floor -- makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them yourself. These
simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, about 16,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”
if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many
might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
D The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a
somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even
fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here’s what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Steering Tips
Using Anti-Lock
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the
brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this
is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Steering
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
4-9
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-10
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section. It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
4-11
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
4-12
D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that if
your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)
D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
4-13
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-14
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle Off Paved Roads
Many of the same design features that help make your
vehicle responsive on paved roads during poor weather
conditions -- features like the locking rear axle and
all-wheel drive -- help make it much better suited for
off-road use than a conventional passenger car. Its higher
ground clearance also helps your vehicle step over some
off-road obstacles. But your vehicle doesn’t have features
like special underbody shielding and a transfer case low
gear range, things that are usually thought necessary for
extended or severe off-road service. This guide is for
operating your vehicle off paved roads.
Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have some
definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t
marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill.
In short, you’ve gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll
find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help
make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and
service work done. Check to make sure all underbody
shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Is there
enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the
fluid levels up where they should be? What are the local
laws that apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving?
If you don’t know, you should check with law
enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
CAUTION:
D Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
D
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
D The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
D Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.
D
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof.
Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward
and low as possible.
You’ll find other important information in this manual.
See “Vehicle Loading” and “Tires” in the Index.
4-15
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges
every off-roader to follow these basic rules for
protecting the environment:
D Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
D Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment -- shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses -- or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
D Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
D Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
D Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-16
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get
accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any
blocked or closed roads.
It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be
handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to
use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and
close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,
feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful
off-road driving. One of the best ways to control your
vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to
keep in mind. At higher speeds:
D you approach things faster and you have less time to
scan the terrain for obstacles.
D you have less time to react.
D you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
D you’ll need more distance for braking, especially
since you’re on an unpaved surface.
CAUTION:
When you’re driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw you
out of position. This could cause you to lose
control and crash. So, whether you’re driving on
or off the road, you and your passengers should
wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different
kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Surface Conditions. Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or
ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration
and braking of your vehicle in different ways. Depending
upon the kind of surface you are on, you may experience
slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration,
poor traction and longer braking distances.
Surface Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you’re not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
D Is the path ahead clear?
D Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
D Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There’s more discussion of these subjects later.)
D Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
4-17
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if
you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even
with one or two wheels, you can’t control the vehicle as
well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment about
what is safe and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.
4-18
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and
an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do.
There are some hills that simply can’t be driven, no
matter how well built the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can’t control your speed. If you
drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one
of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend or
cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small
hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where you
can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the
incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may
not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by
bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
D Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply
steeper in places?
D Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
D Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
won’t have to make turning maneuvers?
D Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
D What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way
to find out.
D Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they
are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-19
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
D Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.
D Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Don’t use more power than you need,
because you don’t want your wheels to start spinning
or sliding.
D Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills,
always try to go straight up.
4-20
D Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
D Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible
to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
D Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to
let opposing traffic know you’re there.
D Use your headlamps even during the day. They make
you more visible to oncoming traffic.
CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can
cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You
could be seriously injured or killed. As you near
the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
Q:
A:
What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I can’t make it up the hill?
If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here’s what you should do:
D Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
D If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
D If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need
to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible
in REVERSE (R).
D As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This
way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight
and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you
back down the hill with your wheels straight rather
than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the left or right will increase the possibility
of a rollover.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or are
about to stall, when going up a hill.
D Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to “rev-up” the engine and regain
forward momentum. This won’t work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. Then
apply the parking brake. Shift to REVERSE (R), release
the parking brake, and slowly back straight down.
D Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall
when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to
stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you to
roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up
the hill, you must back straight down the hill.
4-21
Q:
Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
hill and decide I just can’t do it. What should
I do?
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to
consider a number of things:
D How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
D What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
D Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?
Logs? Boulders?
D What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
4-22
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low
gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and
they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could
cause loss of control and a serious accident.
Apply the brakes lightly when descending a
hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed
under control.
Q:
Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A:
Q:
A:
Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
D Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
D When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
D Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart
across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.
You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down.
D Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”
Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here’s what to do.
Apply the parking brake.
the engine.
D Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
D If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.
Your brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
4-23
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide
whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some
things to consider:
D A hill that can be driven straight up or down may
be too steep to drive across. When you go straight
up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the
distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)
reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end
over end. But when you drive across an incline, the
much more narrow track width (the distance between
the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle
from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an
incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels.
This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
D Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something
that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.
4-24
D Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into
a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you
have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have
rolled over.
CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that’s too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness of the incline, don’t drive
across it. Find another route instead.
Q:
What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to
slide downhill. What should I do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a
much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface is
like before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be
sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get
out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you’ll be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
4-25
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you’ll need
longer braking distances.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud -- the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t
get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel
traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the
sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand
dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has
an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may
want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly
when driving on sand. This will improve traction.
4-26
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet
ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide
out of control.
CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your
vehicle could fall through the ice and you and
your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle
on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems.
But heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood
waters demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or
exhaust pipe, don’t try it -- you probably won’t get
through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle
and other vehicle parts.
If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly.
At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system and
your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you get
your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your tailpipe is
under water, you’ll never be able to start your engine.
When you go through water, remember that when your
brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown. If it’s
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’t drive
through rushing water.
See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more
information on driving through water.
4-27
After Off-Road Driving
Driving at Night
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system
for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-28
Here are some tips on night driving.
D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.
D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
D In remote areas, watch for animals.
D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.
4-29
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
4-30
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
4-31
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Driving Through Flowing Water
NOTICE:
CAUTION:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be
carried away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and the other vehicle occupants
could drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs,
and otherwise be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Turn on your low-beam headlamps -- not just your
parking lamps -- to help make you more visible to others.
D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
D
4-32
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See “Tires”
in the Index.
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
D Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”
D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that
have not cleared the intersection or may be running
the red light.
4-33
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-34
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.
D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
recommended pressure?
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-35
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your mirrors and your instruments
frequently.
D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
4-36
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See “Operating
Your Vehicle Off Paved Roads” in the Index for
information about driving off-road.
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Always have your
engine running and your vehicle in gear when
you go downhill.
D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
D Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
D
D
D
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-37
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
4-38
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
D Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-39
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
D Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-40
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
4-41
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle -- such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a device known as
a “dolly”).
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground, or even with only two of its
wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Don’t tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
if any of its wheels will be on the ground.
4-42
The Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door.
The label shows the size of your original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on
your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
CAUTION:
In the case of a sudden stop or collision, things
carried in the bed of your truck could shift
forward and come into the passenger area,
injuring you and others. If you put things in the
bed of your truck, you should make sure they are
properly secured.
CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.
Your warranty does not cover parts or components that
fail because of overloading.
This will help you decide how much cargo and installed
equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask
your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else -- they go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or
if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
4-43
Payload
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
D Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving” in the Index.
4-44
The payload capacity is shown on the Certification/Tire
label. This is the maximum load capacity that your
vehicle can carry. Be sure to include the weight of the
occupants as part of your load. If you added any
accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the
factory, remember to subtract the weight of these things
from the payload. Your dealer can help you with this.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of the front or rear axle. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
2-Tiered Loading
Add-On Equipment
By positioning four 2″ x 6″ wooden planks across the
width of the pickup box, you can create an upper load
platform. The planks must be inserted in the pickup box
depressions. The length of the planks must allow for at
least a 3/4 inch (2 cm) bearing surface on each end of
the plank.
When you carry removable items, you may need to put a
limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle.
Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install
the new equipment.
When using this upper load platform, be sure the load is
securely tied down to prevent it from shifting. The
load’s center of gravity should be positioned in a zone
over the rear axle. The zone is located in the area
between the front of each wheel well and the rear of
each wheel well. The center of gravity height must not
extend above the top of the pickup box flareboard.
Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’s taillamp area
must be properly marked according to local laws and
regulations.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of the front or rear axle. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Your warranty doesn’t cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of the front or rear axle. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
*Equipment
Maximum Weight
Ladder Rack and Cargo . . . . . . . . . . 750 lbs. (340 kg)
Cross Toolbox and Cargo . . . . . . . . . 400 lbs. (181 kg)
Side Boxes and Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . 250 lbs. per side
(113 kg per side)
* The combined weight for all rail-mounted equipment
should not exceed 1,000 lbs. (454 kg). A reinforcement
kit for rail-mounted add-on equipment is recommended.
See your dealer.
4-45
Truck-Camper Loading Information
This label is inside your glove box. It will tell you if
your vehicle can carry a slide-in camper, how much of a
load your vehicle can carry, and how to correctly spread
out your load. Also, it will help you match the right
slide-in camper to your vehicle.
Refer to the Truck-Camper Loading Information label in
glove box for dimensions A and B as shown in the
following illustration.
When you carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load
of your vehicle is the weight of the camper, plus
D everything else added to the camper after it left
the factory,
D everything in the camper and
D all the people inside.
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum
weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t
include the weight of the people inside. But, you can
figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat.
The total cargo load must not be more than your
vehicle’s CWR.
4-46
Use the rear edge of the load floor for measurement
purposes. The recommended location for the cargo
center of gravity is at point C for the CWR. It is the
point where the mass of a body is concentrated and,
if suspended at that point, would balance the front
and rear.
Here is an example of proper truck and camper match:
If your slide-in camper and its load weighs less than the
CWR, the center of gravity zone for your vehicle may
be larger.
Your dealer can help you make a good vehicle-camper
match. He’ll also help you determine your CWR.
After you’ve loaded your vehicle and camper, drive to a
weigh station and weigh the front and rear wheels
separately. This will tell you the loads on your axles.
The loads on the front and rear axles shouldn’t be more
than either of the GAWRs. The total of the axle loads
should not be more than the GVWR.
A. Camper Center of Gravity
B. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone
The camper’s center of gravity should fall within the
center of gravity zone for your vehicle’s cargo load.
You must weigh any accessories or other equipment that
you add to your vehicle. Then, subtract this extra weight
from the CWR. This extra weight may shorten the
center of gravity zone of your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this.
Open your driver’s door and look at the
Certification/Tire label to find out your GAWR
and GVWR.
If you’ve gone over your weight ratings, move or take
out some things until all the weight falls below the
ratings. Of course, you should always tie down any
loose items when you load your vehicle or camper.
When you install and load your slide-in camper, check
the manufacturer’s instructions.
If you want more information on curb weights, cargo
weights, Cargo Weight Rating and the correct center of
gravity zone for your vehicle, your dealer can help you.
Just ask for a copy of “Consumer Information,
Truck-Camper Loading.”
4-47
Trailer Recommendations
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
You must subtract your hitch loads from the CWR for
your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with the trailer
attached, so that you won’t go over the GVWR or
GAWR. If you are using a weight-distributing hitch,
weigh the vehicle without the equalizer bars in place.
General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners may
consider having the pickup box removed and a
commercial or recreational body installed. Before you
do so, first contact GM Customer Assistance for
information on such conversions specific to this vehicle.
Owners should be aware that, as manufactured, there are
differences between a chassis cab and a pickup with the
box removed which may affect vehicle safety. The
components necessary to adapt a pickup to permit its
safe use with a specialized body should be installed by a
body builder in accordance with the information
available from GM Customer Assistance. See
“Customer Assistance” in the Index.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see “Trailer Towing” in
the Index.
4-48
Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well -- or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice
and information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the information in
“Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
4-49
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
D There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
D Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) or less. You should
always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh
more than 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg). You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
4-50
D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
D You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too
often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions). See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
D the weight of the trailer,
D the weight of the trailer tongue
D and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the
tow/haul mode is to:
D Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
D Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when the
vehicle is unloaded.
Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least
75 percent of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” later in
this section. Tow/haul is most useful under the following
driving conditions:
D When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
through rolling terrain.
D When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in stop and go traffic.
D Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring less
D When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
Your vehicle is equipped with a switch at the end of the
shift lever which when pressed enables tow/haul. When
the switch is pressed, a light on the instrument panel will
illuminate to indicate that tow/haul has been selected.
Tow/haul may be turned off by pressing the switch
again, at which time the indicator light on the instrument
panel will turn off. The vehicle will automatically turn
off tow/haul every time it is started.
Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or
with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of tow/haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Tow/haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
in busy parking lots where improved low speed
control of the vehicle is desired.
4-51
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment
and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should
not be exceeded.
Use one of the following charts to determine how much
your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model
and options.
K-1500*
Engine
Axle Ratio
Max.
GCWR
Trailer Wt.
6000 V8
3.73 w/4WS
8, 300 lbs.
(3 768 kg)
14, 000 lbs.
(6 356 kg)
4.10 w/4WS
10, 300 lbs.
(4 676 kg)
16, 000 lbs.
(7 264 kg)
4-52
* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10 percent to
15 percent of hitch pulling weight 1,000 lb. (454 kg)
maximum. Fifth-wheel hitch tongue weight 15 percent
to 25 percent of hitch pulling weight 1,500 lb. (680 kg)
maximum.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If you’re using a weight-carrying or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A)
should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). Do not exceed the maximum
allowable tongue weight for your vehicle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification/Tire label at the rear edge of the driver’s
door or see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure
you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
4-53
Hitches
Trailer Brakes
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
D If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 5, 000 lbs. (2 270 kg) be sure to
use a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch
and sway control of the proper size. This equipment
is very important for proper vehicle loading and
good handling when you’re driving.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. Always leave just enough slack so you
can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
4-54
Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
D The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
D The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at
the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid to
the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this.
If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel
brake tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
Following Distance
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
While towing a trailer or when exposed to long periods
of sunshine, the floor of the truck bed may become very
warm. Avoid putting items in the truck bed that might be
affected by high ambient temperatures.
4-55
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
4-56
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode” in
the Index.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn
your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do
get the overheat warning, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
Parking on Hills
CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can
be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
D start your engine,
D shift into a gear, and
D release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system
and brake system. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-57
Trailer Wiring Harness
The eight-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package
D
D
D
D
D
D
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Light Blue: Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
D Red: Battery Feed
D Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
Your pickup is equipped with the eight-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector is attached to a bracket on
the hitch platform.
The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) wire is
tied next to the trailer wiring harness for use with a
trailer, slide-in camper or cap.
4-58
A jumper harness for an electric trailer brake controller
and a trailer battery feed fuse are included with this
trailering package. (See “Instrument Panel Jumper
Wiring Harness” later in this section.)
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector is
included with your vehicle. See “Four-Wire Trailer
Harness Adapter” later in this section.
Instrument Panel Jumper Wiring Harness
Four Wire Trailer Harness Adapter
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector is
included with your vehicle.
Connect the adapter with
the tab (arrow) pointing
towards the top. The cap
on the wiring harness will
lock onto the tab (arrow)
and help hold the adapter
in place.
This harness is included with the heavy-duty and
camper/fifth-wheel trailer wiring packages. The harness
is for an electric trailer brake controller and includes a
trailer battery feed fuse. This harness and fuse should be
installed by your dealer or a qualified service center.
4-59
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-9
5-9
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5-12
5-18
5-18
5-19
5-32
5-33
Cooling System
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
Spare Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flasher
button is located at the top
of the steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the
flashers off.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
5-2
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to following the steps below to do
it safely.
CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all
of these things can hurt you.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty.
The ACDelcoR battery in your vehicle has a
built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jump
start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or
light yellow. Replace the battery when there is a
clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking
complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
5-3
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off all lamps
that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it
could save your radio!
5-4
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (-) terminal locations on the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (-) jump starting
terminal. You should always use the remote
positive (+) and the remote negative (-) terminals
instead of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals
on your battery. The remote positive (+) terminal is
located behind a red plastic cover near the engine
accessory drive bracket. To uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal, open the red plastic cover.
The remote negative (-) terminal is located on the
engine accessory drive bracket. This is marked
“GND.” See “Engine Compartment Overview” in
the Index for more information on location.
CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelcoR battery
(or batteries) installed in every new GM vehicle.
But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to
take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or a remote negative (-)
terminal if the vehicle has one. Don’t connect
positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll get a short that
would damage the battery and maybe other parts too.
5-5
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of
the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
5-6
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Use a remote
negative (-) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t
go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part or to a remote negative (-) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead battery.
9.
Connect the other
end of the negative (-)
cable to the remote
negative (-) terminal,
marked GND, on the
vehicle with the dead
battery. If the THEFT
SYSTEM light flashes,
wait until the light stops
flashing before starting
the engine.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
NOTICE:
Damage to your vehicle may result from electrical
shorting if jumper cables are removed incorrectly.
To prevent electrical shorting, take care that they
don’t touch each other or any other metal. The
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
5-7
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover to its
original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (-) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (-) Terminals.
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
5-8
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
“Roadside Assistance” in the Index. If you want to tow
your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational
purposes (such as behind a motorhome), see
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in the Index.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” in the Index. In addition, you will
find a LOW COOLANT, CHECK COOLANT TEMP,
ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED ENGINE
POWER message in the message center on the
instrument panel. See “Message Center” in the Index.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups
of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a loss in power and engine performance.
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to
a safe place in an emergency. Driving extended miles
(km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection
mode should be avoided.
NOTICE:
After driving in the overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow
the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair
the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset
the oil life system. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
5-9
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool. See “Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode” in the Index for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
5-10
NOTICE:
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index
for information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant message,
can indicate a serious problem. See “Low Coolant
Message” in the Index.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant message, but see or hear no steam, the problem
may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a
little too hot when you:
D
D
D
D
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE ( )
or DRIVE (D).
B
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools
down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” listed previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-11
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should
be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it isn’t,
you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
5-12
CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving to
a safe place in an emergency.
NOTICE:
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when
idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
When adding coolant, it is important that you use
only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use
of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
5-13
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level isn’t at or above the FULL COLD
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be
sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for more information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system
and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you
ever have to turn the pressure cap.
5-14
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOLR coolant.
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
So use the recommended coolant.
1. Park the vehicle on a
level surface. You can
remove the coolant
surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling
system, including the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap and upper
radiator hose, is no
longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise (left)
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-15
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-16
3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the FULL COLD mark.
5. Then replace the
pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap
is hand-tight and
fully seated.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5-17
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully engages. So you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This noise may also occur
while driving in stop and go traffic. This is normal and
should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or
making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system
functioning properly. The fan will slow down when
additional cooling is not required and the clutch
disengages.
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-18
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Put the wheel blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the
one being changed. That would be the
tire on the other side of the vehicle, at
the opposite end.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
5-19
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need is under the passenger’s side
second row seat. The spare tire is located underneath
the vehicle.
1. Pull up the second row seat with the loop at the base
of the seat cushion to access the tools.
2. The wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer can
be removed by turning the wing nut
counterclockwise.
3. To release the bottle jack from its holder, turn the
knob on the bottle jack counterclockwise to lower
the jack head slightly.
4. There is also a wing nut used to retain the storage
bag and tools. To remove it, turn the wingnut
counterclockwise.
You’ll use the jack handle and the wheel wrench to
remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
5-20
Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire:
1. Your vehicle is equipped with a hoist lock. Open the
spare tire lock cover on the bumper and use the
ignition key to remove the lock.
2. Assemble the wheel wrench and the two jack handle
extensions as shown. Insert the hoist end (open end)
of the extension through the hole in the rear bumper.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects into
the hoist shaft.
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the
wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle. The wheel wrench has a
hook that allows you to pull the hoist cable towards
you, to assist in reaching the spare tire.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Hoist Assembly
Wheel Wrench
Extensions
Hoist Shaft
Valve Stem,
Pointed Down
F. Spare Tire
G.
H.
I.
J.
Tire Retainer
Hoist Cable
Hoist Lock
Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
K. Hoist End
4. When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at
the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through
the wheel opening.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-21
The tools you’ll be using include the bottle jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the vehicle, you’ll need
to use both jack handle extensions.
5-22
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extensions
(as needed). Attach the jack handle to the jack.
To remove the center cap
place the chisel end of the
wheel wrench in the slot
on the wheel and gently
pry out.
Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack lift
head a little.
5-23
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
1. Use the wheel wrench to
loosen all the wheel
nuts. Turn the wheel
wrench
counterclockwise to
loosen the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
2. Position the jack under the vehicle. If the flat tire is
on the front of the vehicle, position the jack on the
frame behind the flat tire.
If the flat tire is on the rear, position the jack under
the rear axle between the spring anchor and the
shock absorber bracket.
NOTICE:
If your vehicle is equipped with
QUADRASTEER avoid contact with tie rods
and tire rod boots when jacking the vehicle.
t
5-24
CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
Front Position
5-25
4. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
Rear Position
3. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the rear
axle is resting securely between the grooves that are
on the jack head. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise
to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire
to fit under the wheel well.
5-26
5. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
6. After mounting the
spare, put the
wheel nuts back on
with the rounded
end of the nuts
toward the wheel.
Tighten each wheel
nut by hand. Then
use the wheel
wrench until the
wheel is held
against the hub.
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-27
Front Position
Rear Position
7. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
5-28
8. Tighten the nuts
firmly in a
crisscross sequence
as shown by
turning the wheel
wrench clockwise.
CAUTION:
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
When you reinstall the full-size wheel and tire, you
must also reinstall the center cap. Place the cap on the
wheel and tap it into place until it seats flush with
the wheel.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the Index.
5-29
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
Return the bottle jack, wheel blocks, wheel wrench and
jack extensions to their location under the passenger’s
side second row seat. Secure the items in the vehicle
as shown.
5-30
A. Wing Nut
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wheel Wrench and
Extensions Retainer
D. Gloves
E. Wheel Wrench
and Extensions
F.
G.
H.
I.
Storage Bag
Bottle Jack Holder
Bottle Jack
Wheel Block
Retainer
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier. To store the tire, do the following:
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed downward
and to the rear.
2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel
opening. Make sure that the retainer is fully seated
across the underside of the wheel.
3. Attach the wheel wrench and extensions together.
Insert the hoist end through the hole in the rear
bumper and into the hoist shaft.
4. Raise the tire part of the way upward. When the tire
is almost in the stored position, adjust the tire so that
the valve stem is toward the rear of the vehicle.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Hoist Assembly
Wheel Wrench
Extensions
Hoist Shaft
E. Valve Stem,
Pointed Down
F. Flat or Spare Tire
G. Retainer
H. Hoist Cable
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until the
tire is secure and the cable is tight. The spare tire
hoist cannot be overtightened.
5-31
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation
pressure regularly. See “Inflation-Tire Pressure” and
“Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index for information
regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle.
For instruction on how to remove, install or store a spare
tire, see “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
is correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road tire
repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed
back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire will be
available in case you need it again.
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and
then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench/hoist shaft to tighten the cable.
Replace the jack, tools and spare tire lock.
5-32
If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not match your
vehicle’s original road tires and wheels in size and type,
do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
NOTICE:
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
CAUTION:
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured. And,
the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
5-33
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
Using the Recovery Hooks
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a
few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use
your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them. If you do
need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
Your vehicle is equipped with recovery hooks. The
hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. You may
need to use them if you’re stuck off-road and need to be
pulled to some place where you can continue driving.
5-34
CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force.
Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull
on the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks
could break off and you or others could be
injured from the chain or cable snapping back.
NOTICE:
Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle.
Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not
be covered by warranty.
5-35
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-6
6-8
6-11
6-17
6-19
6-20
6-23
6-24
6-27
6-30
6-31
6-32
Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear Axle
All-Wheel Drive
Engine Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
6-33
6-36
6-37
6-46
6-47
6-56
6-56
6-60
6-64
6-65
6-66
6-76
6-76
6-77
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
6-
6-1
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-2
CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of
87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it is bad
enough, it can damage your engine. A little pinging
noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is considered
normal. This does not indicate a problem exists or that a
higher-octane fuel is necessary.
6-3
Gasoline Specifications
California Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the
Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers’ Association for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasolines.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index)
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
In Canada, look for
the “Auto Makers’
Choice” label on
the pump.
Additives
Canada Only
6-4
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel
contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the
use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission
control system may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
You should not have to add anything to your fuel.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage wouldn’t be covered under your
warranty.
6-5
Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
While refueling, hang the fuel cap by the tether using
the hook located on the inside of the filler door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise).
The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
6-6
CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. This spray can happen if
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot
weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for
any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all
the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you
get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This
may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See “Malfunction Indicator
Lamp” in the Index.
6-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-8
Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
To open the hood, do the following:
Hood Release
The hood release is located
inside the vehicle on the
lower left side of the
instrument panel.
1. Pull out on the hood release handle.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the
secondary hood release, located near the center of
the grille.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on
correctly. Pull down the hood and close it firmly.
6-9
Engine Compartment Overview
When you lift the hood on the VORTEC 6000 V8 engine, you’ll see:
6-10
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
B. Coolant Surge Tank
C. Air Cleaner/Filter
Restriction Indicator
D. Engine Oil Dipstick
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap
F. Automatic Transmission Dipstick
G. Fan
H. Remote Negative (-)
Terminal (GND)
Engine Oil
If the CHECK ENG OIL
LEVEL light appears on the
instrument cluster, it means
you need to check your
engine oil level right away.
For more information, see
“CHECK ENG OIL
LEVEL” in the Index.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir
L. Underhood Fuse Block
M. Battery
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
6-11
Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick has
a yellow looped handle and
is located on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle. See
“Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index
for more information on
location.
6-12
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and
Specifications” in the Index.
The engine oil fill cap is
located on the passenger’s
side valve cover.
NOTICE:
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on location.
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so
much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area upper mark that shows the
proper operating range, your engine could
be damaged.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
6-13
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any
oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container. If
you have your oil changed
for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is
American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6-14
As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is best for
your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s
going to be 0 F (-18 C) or above. These numbers on an
oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.
_
_
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result
in engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM GoodwrenchR oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls
below -20 F (-29 C), consider using either an
SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil.
Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection
for your engine at extremely low temperatures.
_
_
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System )
t
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within the
next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if
you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. It is also important to check your
oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change
your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
6-15
How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Message
What to Do with Used Oil
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation
occurs where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message being turned on, reset
the system.
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, do
the following:
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or
into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
t
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three
times within five seconds.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message flashes for
five seconds, the system is reset. If the system will
not reset, try the procedure again. If the system still
does not reset, see your dealer for service.
6-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The air cleaner/filter assembly has an indicator that lets
you know when the engine air cleaner/filter is dirty and
needs to be serviced. The air cleaner/filter indicator is
located on the air cleaner cover. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in the Index for more
information on location.
See “Owner Checks and Services” in the Index to
determine when to check the indicator.
The service window A with
the percentage scale shows
the amount of engine air
cleaner/filter life used.
When both service window
A and service window B
turn orange, replace the
engine air cleaner/filter.
The air cleaner/filter assembly is located on the front
corner of the engine compartment on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for more information
on location.
After changing the air filter, press the top button on the
indicator to reset it.
6-17
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the engine air cleaner/filter. See “Owner Checks
and Services” in the Index.
CAUTION:
To replace the engine air cleaner/filter do the following:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
1. Loosen the screws on the cover of the housing and
lift up the cover.
2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care
should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
NOTICE:
3. Clean the filter sealing surface and the housing.
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily
get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you’re driving.
4. Install the new engine air cleaner/filter.
5. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
6-18
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Your vehicle is equipped with a passenger compartment
air filter. The filter is located under the instrument panel,
below the glove compartment. Your vehicle may or may
not be equipped with an access panel.
2. Reach under the
instrument panel
towards the front of the
vehicle and pull
downward on the filter
retaining bracket.
To replace the passenger compartment air filter, do the
following:
1. If your vehicle does not have an access panel, skip
this step. If your vehicle is equipped with an access
panel, remove the bolts on it and set the panel aside.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have it done at your dealer’s service
department.
3. Remove the air filter by pulling downward on the
element. Remove the second portion of the air filter
by sliding it towards the rear of the vehicle and then
pulling downward.
4. Install the new filter by reversing the steps listed
previously. Be sure to follow any instructions that
may be included in the replacement filter package.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the passenger compartment air filter. See
“Scheduled Maintenance” in the Index.
6-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service department.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
NOTICE:
D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D When doing frequent trailer towing.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if
you check your transmission fluid.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
D
D
D
D
6-20
When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180_F to 200_F
(82_C to 93_C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50_F
(10_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), drive the
vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at
idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50_F
(10_C) or more. If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will
give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
D Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
6-21
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
The red transmission dipstick handle with this symbol is
located at the rear of the engine compartment, on the
passenger’s side. See “Engine Compartment Overview”
in the Index for further information on location.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT area, or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and
wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
6-22
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
while it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a
reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of
the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for
a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
D After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
D When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRONR-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than
DEXRONR-III is not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
6-23
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
All-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
The proper level is from 5/8 inch to 1 5/8 inch (15 mm
to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
6-24
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
Automatic Transfer Case (A) Fill Plug
(B) Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
6-25
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
6-26
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOLR engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOLR extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant will:
D
D
D
D
D
Give freezing protection down to -34_F (-37_C).
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use
only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use
of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
6-27
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you
don’t need to add anything else.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOLR coolant.
6-28
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank is
located on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle in the
engine compartment.
CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap -- even a
little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on location.
If the LOW COOLANT
message comes on and stays
on, it means you’re low on
engine coolant.
See “Low Coolant Message” in the Index.
6-29
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
The coolant surge tank
pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant
surge tank.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
NOTICE:
Your coolant surge tank pressure cap is a 15 psi
(105 kPa) pressure-type cap and must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss and possible
engine damage from overheating.
6-30
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for reservoir location.
6-31
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for reservoir location.
NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid,
D
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until
the tank is full.
6-32
D
D
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
CAUTION:
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the
reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid
goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake
lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level
goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in
this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.
6-33
Checking Brake Fluid
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
CAUTION:
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system
checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
6-34
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
D
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn
and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or
be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
6-35
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this
manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake
parts. When you replace parts of your braking
6-36
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in -- be sure you get
new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your
brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if
someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes
can change -- for the worse. The braking performance
you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if
someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelcoR battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco
battery. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for battery location.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
Bulb Replacement
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed here, contact
your dealer.
CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
For the proper types of bulbs to use, see “Replacement
Bulbs” in the Index.
Halogen Bulbs
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
6-37
Headlamps
A. Low-Beam Headlamp
B. High-Beam Headlamp
2. Pull the headlamp assembly out.
1. Remove the two pins on the top of the headlamp
assembly. To remove the pins, turn the outer pin
outward and pull it straight up. To remove the inner
pin, turn it inward and pull it straight up.
3. Unplug the electrical connector.
4. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and remove it
from the headlamp lens assembly.
5. Put the new bulb into the lens assembly and turn it
clockwise until it is tight. Use care not to touch the
bulb with your fingers or hands.
6. Plug in the electrical connector.
7. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
Re-install and tighten the two pins.
6-38
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps
A. Sidemarker Lamp
B. Retainer Clip
2. Press the retainer clip (B), located behind the turn
signal housing, towards the outside of the vehicle.
C. Front Turn Signal Lamp
3. Pull the turn signal housing out of the vehicle.
D. Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
4. Press the locking release lever, turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from the turn signal
housing.
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as mentioned
previously.
6-39
5. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.
6. Put a new bulb into the bulb socket. Use care not to
touch the bulb with your fingers or hands.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
and Cargo Lamp
7. Put the bulb socket back into the turn signal housing
and turn it clockwise until it locks.
8. Put the turn signal housing back into the vehicle
placing the hook and posts on the inner side into the
alignment holes first, then the outer side into the
retainer bracket until you hear a click.
9. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
1. Remove the screws and lift off the lamp assembly.
6-40
A. Cargo Lamps
B. Center High-Mounted Stoplamps (CHMSL)
2. Remove the CHMSL bulb holder back plate from the
housing by pressing the release tabs.
3. A CHMSL bulb is removed by pulling the bulb
straight out from the holder back plate. A cargo bulb
is removed by turning the socket counterclockwise
and pulling the bulb straight out.
4. If a CHMSL bulb is replaced, put the new bulb into
the socket and press it in until it is tight. If a cargo
lamp is replaced, put a new cargo lamp bulb into the
socket and press it in until it is tight before turning
the socket clockwise.
5. Put the bulb holder back plate into the lamp housing.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws.
6-41
Pickup Box Identification/Fender
Marker Lamps
Taillamps
1. Open the tailgate.
1. Remove the screws and lamp assembly.
2. Unplug the lamp assembly harness.
3. Gently pry the individual lamp from the lamp
housing.
4. Unplug the lamp.
5. Plug in a new lamp and snap it into the housing.
6. Reinstall the lamp housing.
2. Remove the two rear lamp assembly screws near the
tailgate latch and pull out the lamp assembly.
6-42
A. Stoplamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Back-Up Lamp
3. Press the release tab and turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp
housing.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.
5. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the socket
clockwise into the taillamp housing until it clicks.
6. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten
the screws.
7. Close the tailgate.
6-43
Front Roof Marker Lamps
1. Remove the two screws
and lift off the lens.
The center roof marker lamp has six screws
to remove.
2. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise to remove it
from the socket.
6-44
3. Put a new bulb into the
socket and turn
clockwise until it locks
in place.
4. Reinstall the lens and tighten the screws.
6-45
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in the Index for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in
the Index.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly, do
the following:
1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is facing
away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
6-46
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Warranty booklet for details.
CAUTION: (Continued)
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are
dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
D
D
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
6-47
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Certification/Tire label, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy
NOTICE: (Continued)
6-48
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the
tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles (10 000
to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate
your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s
Time for New Tires” and “Wheel Replacement” later in
this section for more information. Make sure the spare tire
is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn
the tire. If it moves, use the wheel wrench/hoist shaft to
tighten the cable. See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools” in the Index.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the
most important. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in
the Index for scheduled rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here. Don’t include the spare tire in your
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Certification/Tire label. Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in
the Index.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.
6-49
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
D You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
D You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s
rubber.
D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
6-50
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
If your vehicle has 17 inch road tires (those
originally installed on your vehicle) it is all right
to drive with the 16 inch spare tire that came
with your vehicle. When new, your vehicle
included a spare tire and wheel assembly with the
same overall diameter as your vehicle’s road tires
and wheels. Because this spare tire was developed
for use on your vehicle, it will not affect vehicle
handling or cause damage to your vehicle.
CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-51
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a
half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
6-52
Traction -- AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature -- A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
6-53
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
CAUTION:
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for
replacement.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and clearance to
the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more
information.
6-54
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
Don’t use tire chains. There’s not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you
or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
6-55
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
D
D
D
D
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
Paint Thinner
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from
your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials” in
the Index.
Turpentine
Here are some cleaning tips:
Lacquer Thinner
D Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
D Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
6-56
D Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
D Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove any excess cleaner.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry
completely.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
6-57
Cleaning Vinyl
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do it more than once.
D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and
a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this
product.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Cleaning Leather
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Cleaning Wood Panels
D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
6-58
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood
immediately with a clean cloth.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they
may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the
inside rear window, since they may have to be
scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on
the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger
element may be damaged. Any temporary license
should not be attached across the defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads
do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
6-59
Weatherstrips
Washing Your Vehicle
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Index.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle. If your vehicle is equipped with
QUADRASTEER see “Car washes” in the Index.
6-60
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow
instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A
coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright metal parts.
6-61
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the paint
finish and tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
6-62
Finish Damage
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into
the paint surface.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.
6-63
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
6-64
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label located in the glove box. It’s very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
D
D
D
D
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
6-65
Electrical System
Windshield Wipers
Add-On Electrical Equipment
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
6-66
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access door
is on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel at the end.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a
spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.
You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor which is
mounted to the fuse block access door. To remove fuses
if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold the end of the
fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull it
straight out.
You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse block
access door. These can be used to replace a bad fuse.
However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.
6-67
Fuse
Usage
LOCK
Power Door Lock Relay
HVAC 1
Climate Control System
CRUISE
Cruise Control, Instrument
Panel Cluster
IGN 3
Ignition, Power Seats
4WD
Not Used
CRANK
Starting System
INT PRK
Interior Lamps
L DOOR
Power Door Lock Relay
BRAKE
Anti-Lock Brake System
RR WIPER
Not Used
Fuse
Usage
ILLUM
Interior Lamps
L BODY
Retained Accessory Power Relay
SEAT
Power Seat Circuit Breaker
LOCK
Power Door Locks
TURN
Exterior Lamps, Turn Signals,
Hazard Lamps
DRV UNLOCK
Power Door Lock Relay
6-68
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
UNLOCK
Power Door Locks
IGN 0
HTR A/C
Climate Control System
PRND321 Display,
Odometer, PCM
WS WPR
Windshield Wipers
SEO IGN
Special Equipment Option,
Ignition, Manual Selectable Ride
IGN 1
Ignition, Instrument Panel
SEO ACCY
AIR BAG
Air Bag
Special Equipment Option
Accessory, Cellular Telephone
MIR/LOCK
Power Mirrors, Power Door Locks
RAP #1
Retained Accessory Power Relay
DR LOCK
Power Door Locks
RDO 1
Audio System
PWR WDO
Power Window Circuit Breaker
RAP #2
Not Used
UNLOCK
Power Door Lock Relay
6-69
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuse Name
Usage
The center instrument panel fuse block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
SEO
Special Equipment Option
HTD ST
Heated Seats
SPARE
Not Used
VANITY
Headliner Wiring
TRAILER
Trailer Brake Wiring
PWR ST
Power Seats
SPARE
Not Used
UPF
Upfitter
PARK LAMP
Parking Lamps
FRT PRK
EXPT*
Not Used
SPARE 2
Not Used
PUDDLE LP
Puddle Lamps
SL RIDE
Not Used
SPARE 3
Not Used
INADV PWR
Interior Lamps Feed
CTSY LP
Courtesy Lamps
CEL PHONE
Cellular Telephone Wiring
6-70
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle near the battery. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in the Index for more
information on its location. Lift the cover for access to
the fuse/relay block.
Once you remove the cover, you will see some fuses to
the top right of the fuse/relay block. These are spare
fuses and can be used accordingly.
You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse
extractor is located in the underhood fuse block. To
remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold the
end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger
and pull straight out.
6-71
6-72
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
STUD #1
Accessory Power/Trailer Wiring
Feed/Load Leveling
STARTER
Starter (Relay)
PARK LP
Parking Lamps
ABS
Anti-Lock Brakes
FRT HVAC
Climate Control System
IGN A
Ignition Switch
STOP LP
Exterior Lamps, Stoplamps
AIR
A.I.R. System
ECM 1
VCM/PCM
RAP #1
Retained Accessory Power, Power
Mirrors, Power Door Locks,
Power Seat(s)
CHMSL
Center High Mounted Stoplamp
VEH STOP
Stoplamps, Cruise Control
IGN B
Ignition Switch
TRL B/U
Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring
RAP #2
Retained Accessory Power/Rear
Power Windows, Sunroof, Radio
INJ A
Fuel Controls, Ignition
RR HVAC
Rear HVAC
STUD #2
Accessory Power/Trailer Wiring
Brake Feed
VEH B/U
Vehicle Backup Lamps
TRL R TRN
Right Turn Signal Trailer Wiring
ENG 1
Engine Controls, Canister Purge,
Fuel System
TRL L TRN
Left Turn Signal Trailer Wiring
ETC
Electronic Throttle Control
IGN 1
Ignition, Fuel Controls
IGN E
INJ B
Ignition, Fuel Controls (Relay)
A/C Compressor Relay, Rear
Window Defogger, Daytime
Running Lamps, A.I.R. System
6-73
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
B/U LP
Backup Lamps, Automatic
Transmission Shift Lock
Control System
PRIME
Not Used
RT HDLP
Passenger’s Side Headlamps
DRL
Daytime Running Lamps (Relay)
HTD MIR
Heated Mirrors
LT HDLP
Driver’s Side Headlamps
ATC
Automatic Transfer Case
RR DEFOG
Rear Window Defogger, Heated
Mirrors (Relay)
RTD
Not Used
A/C
Air Conditioning
RR PRK
Passenger’s Side Parking Lamps
AUX PWR
ECM B
VCM/PCM
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary
Power Outlets
F/PMP
Fuel Pump (Relay)
SEO 2
Special Equipment Option Power,
Power Seats, Aux Roof Mnt Lamp
O2 A
Oxygen Sensors
SEO 1
O2 B
Oxygen Sensors
Special Equipment Option Power,
Aux Roof Mnt Lamp
LR PRK
Driver’s Side Parking Lamps
DRL
Daytime Running Lamps
RR DEFOG
Rear Window Defogger,
Heated Mirrors
A/C
A/C (Relay)
FOG LP
Fog Lamps
HDLP
Headlamps (Relay)
FOG LP
Fog Lamps (Relay)
TRL PRK
Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring
RADIO
Audio System, Instrument Panel
Cluster, Climate Control System
6-74
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
CIGAR
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary
Power Outlets
IGN C
Ignition Switch, Fuel Pump,
PRND321 Display, Crank
RT TURN
Right Turn Signals
RDO AMP
Radio Amplifier
BTSI
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System
HAZ LP
Exterior Lamps, Hazard Lamps
EXP LPS
Not Used
LT TURN
Left Turn Signals
HORN
Horn
FR PRK
Front Parking Lamps,
Sidemarker Lamps
CTSY LP
Interior Lamps
W/W PMP
Windshield Washer Pump
RR WPR
Not Used
HORN
Horn (Relay)
TBC
Body Control Module (BCM),
Remote Keyless Entry, Headlamps
6-75
Replacement Bulbs
Lamp
Bulb Number
Low-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005 or
9005 LL (long life)
High-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . 4157K or
3157KX
Front Roof Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Front Parking and Turn Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 or
3157K (long life)
Rear Marker Lamp, Taillamp
and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Rear Turn Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Fender Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8 quarts (14.0 L)
Engine Oil with Filter . . . . . . . . . . 6.0 quarts (5.7 L)
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.0 U.S. gallons (98.4 L)
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to
fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the Index.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Capacity
If you do your own service work, you’ll need the proper
service manual. See “Doing Your Own Service Work” in
the Index for additional information. It is recommended
that service work on your air conditioning system be
performed by a qualified technician.
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant R134a . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.76 lbs. (0.8 kg)
Use Refrigerant Oil, R134a Systems
6-76
Engine Specifications
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VORTEC 6000
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V8
VIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . U
Spark Plug Gap . . . . . . . . . . 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
Wheels and Tires
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . 140 lb-ft (190 N·m)
Tire Pressure . . . . . . See the Certification/Tire label
on the rear edge of the driver’s door.
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Oil Filter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PF59
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1518C
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter Kit** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52485513
PCV Valve* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CV948C
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTZ16R15 Denso
PZTR5A15 NGK
Fuel Filter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GF626
Wiper Blades** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15153642
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ITTA
* ACDelcoR Part No.
**GM Part No.
6-77
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-16
Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Scheduled Maintenance
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
7-21
7-23
7-26
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-
7-1
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
7-2
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure to
follow recommended maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
what should be checked and when. It also explains
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help keep
your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or
their equivalents, should be used whether you do the
work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for
you to record and keep track of the maintenance
performed on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle
for warranty repairs.
If you want to get the service information, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in
many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
7-4
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle
uses these. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
D carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.
D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
D are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See “Operating Your Vehicle Off Paved Roads” in
the Index.
D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) and 200,000 miles (332 000 km) should
be repeated at the same intervals after 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) and 200,000 miles (332 000 km) for
the life of this vehicle.
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of
this schedule.
7-5
Scheduled Maintenance
Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication
Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the
GM Oil Life Systemt (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). Reset the system.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will
come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within the
next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if
you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life
7-6
system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. It is also important to check your
oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change
your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed. See “Oil Life System” in the Index
for information on resetting the system.
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components with each engine oil and
filter change. Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints,
steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer case
shift linkage and parking brake cable guides. Ball joints
should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10_F
(-12_C) or higher, or they could be damaged.
Scheduled Maintenance
7-7
Scheduled Maintenance
7-8
Scheduled Maintenance
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty
conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-9
Scheduled Maintenance
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty
conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Replace fuel filter.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty
conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-10
Scheduled Maintenance
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-11
Scheduled Maintenance
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty
conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace fuel filter.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Inspect Evaporative Control System. Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, routing and condition. Check that the purge valve works
properly, if equipped. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-12
Scheduled Maintenance
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty
conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
j Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly under dusty
conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-13
Scheduled Maintenance
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
7-14
Scheduled Maintenance
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
j
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-15
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the
Index for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires” in the
Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
7-16
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check
of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to
the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that the
spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to
rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheel
wrench/ratchet to tighten the cable. See “Storing the
Spare Tire and Tools” in the Index.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction
Indicator Check
Your vehicle has an indicator located on the air cleaner
in the engine compartment that lets you know when the
air cleaner filter is dirty and needs to be changed. Check
indicator at least twice a year or when your engine oil is
changed, whichever occurs first. See “Air Cleaner” in
the Index for more information. Inspect your air cleaner
filter restriction indicator more often if the vehicle is
used in dusty areas or under off road conditions.
7-17
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index. A fluid
loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and
repair if needed.
7-18
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
tailgate hinge, tailgate linkage, tailgate handle pivot
points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, locks and folding seat
hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn
off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
7-19
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
D The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
D The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P) Mechanism Check
CAUTION:
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
D To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
7-20
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center
do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering and Suspension Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”
in the Index.
7-21
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help
ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap is recommended at least once
a year.
7-22
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) Inspection
Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals, check
front axle and transfer case and add lubricant when
necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check
and have it repaired, if needed. Check vent hose at
transfer case for kinks and proper installation.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol
of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only GM
GoodwrenchR DEX-COOLR or
HavolineR DEX-COOLR
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
USAGE
Hydraulic Brake
System
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Power Steering
System
Automatic
Transmission
Key Lock
Cylinders
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Delco Supreme 11R Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
GM OptikleenR Washer
Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
DEXRONR-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
7-23
USAGE
Floor Shift
Linkage
FLUID/LUBRICANT
LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent)
or lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Front and
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. 12378261) or
equivalent meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
7-24
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Steerable
Rear Axle
(Quadrasteer )
Synthetic Axle Lubricant; use only
GM Part No. 12378557. Do not
add friction modifier.
t
Transfer Case
DEXRONR-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Rear Driveline
Center Spline
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent)
or lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Front Axle
Propshaft Spline
Spline Lubricant, Special
Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12345879) or lubricant
meeting requirements
of GM 9985830.
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Hood Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Tailgate Handle
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
Pivot Points,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
Hinges, Latch
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Bolt and Linkage
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Tailgate Hinge
and Linkage,
Folding Seat and
Fuel Door Hinge
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with
Teflon, SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12371287 or equivalent).
7-25
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the
boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or
“Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-26
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-27
Maintenance Record
DATE
7-28
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact GMC if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service
publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Customer Assistance Offices
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
Roadside Assistance
Canadian Roadside Assistance
8-8
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-11
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
8-
8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of
all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by
calling 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Customer
Assistance prompt). In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting GMC, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you
should file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to
enforce any additional rights you may have. Canadian
owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for information on the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it
and proceed with any other venue for relief available
to you.
8-3
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle
age, mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available
at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY
user can communicate with GMC by dialing:
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583). (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
8-4
Customer Assistance Offices
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to
GMC, the letter should be addressed to GMC’s
Customer Assistance Center.
United States
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583)
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
From:
Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52 - 53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward aftermarket driver
or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
When calling from outside Canada, please dial
1-905-644-3063. All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
8-5
Roadside Assistance
Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the customer
to get to the nearest service station (up to $5.00) will
be covered.
Jump Start: No-start situations which require a battery
jump start will be covered at no charge.
Lock Out: Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry
into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement key will
be covered at no charge within 10 miles (16 km).
Emergency Towing Service: Towing to the nearest
GMC dealer for warranty related disablements will
be covered.
GMC’s Roadside Assistance provides stranded owners
with over-the-phone roadside repairs, location of the
nearest GMC dealer or the following special services:
Flat Tire Change: Installation of spare tire will be
covered at no charge (customer is responsible for repair
or replacement of tire).
8-6
Trip Routing: Custom-made, computerized highlighted
maps using the most direct or scenic route are provided
free of charge. Maps include points of interest and a list
of GMC dealers along the route. Also included is a list
of hotels along the route that are discounted through
affiliation with “Quest International.” Trip Routing
is available through Roadside Assistance by calling
1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782). Please be prepared
to provide your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Allow five working days for fulfillment.
Trip Interruption Assistance: GMC will reimburse any
reasonable trip interruption expenses (up to $500.00)
when directly associated with warranty disablement.
Trip Interruption service covers expenses such as meals
and overnight lodging if vehicle disablement occurs at
least 150 miles (240 km) from your home or rental
property. You will be required to obtain prior approval
from GMC Roadside Assistance and pay for expenses
at the time of disablement. Original receipts should
be submitted to GMC Roadside Assistance for
reimbursement. A service representative will provide
assistance when you call.
The Roadside Assistance services listed are available
to retail and retail lease customers operating 2002 GMC
light duty trucks for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles
(60 000 km). All services must be pre-arranged by
GMC Roadside Assistance.
Over-the-phone assistance, such as providing the
name of the closest dealer or minor technical advice,
etc., is available to all owner/operators of GMC trucks,
regardless of vehicle or mileage.
Just dial GMC Roadside Assistance at 1-800-GMC-8782
(1-800-462-8782, Roadside Assistance prompt) to
reach a qualified representative who can assist you.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Your Roadside Assistance representative will ask for the
following information when your call is received:
D Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
D Name and home address
D Telephone number and location from which you
are calling
D Location, license plate number and color of your
GMC truck
D Mileage of vehicle and description of problem
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week, 365 days a year, including weekends
and holidays. Should you have any questions about
roadside assistance, call the GMC Roadside Assistance
Center or contact your dealer.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GMC reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book or
call 1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
8-7
Courtesy Transportation
GMC has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are proud
to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
8-8
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait GMC helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service
to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride
to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also
be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of
the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new
vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealers and all program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
8-9
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS TO THE UNITED
STATES GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
GENERAL MOTORS
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-GMC-8782
(1-800-462-8782), or write:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-11
SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
Service Manuals
Owner’s Information
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case
Unit Repair Manual
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments and specifications
for GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist
in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 – Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover)
Helm, Incorporated S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
8-12
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds.
Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U.S. funds.